Upload
donhi
View
238
Download
3
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Study Notebook
Teacher Annotated Edition
00i_GEOSN_TP_TAE_890858.indd 100i_GEOSN_TP_TAE_890858.indd 1 6/11/08 1:05:36 AM6/11/08 1:05:36 AM
Copyright © by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without prior written permission of the publisher.
Send all inquiries to:Glencoe/McGraw-Hill8787 Orion PlaceColumbus, OH 43240
ISBN: 978-0-07-890858-3MHID: 0-07-890858-2
Printed in the United States of America
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 009 14 13 12 11 10 09 08
PDF 2nd0ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in2 20ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in2 2 6/12/08 7:30:35 PM6/12/08 7:30:35 PM
iii
Chapter 1Before You Read ............................................. 1Key Points ........................................................ 21-1 Points, Lines, and Planes ........................... 31-2 Linear Measure and Precision ................... 51-3 Distance and Midpoints .............................. 71-4 Angle Measure ........................................... 91-5 Angle Relationships .................................. 111-6 Two-Dimensional Figures ......................... 131-7 Three-Dimensional Figures ...................... 15Tie It Together ................................................ 17Before the Test .............................................. 18
Chapter 2Before You Read ........................................... 19Key Points ...................................................... 202-1 Inductive Reasoning and Conjecture ....... 212-2 Logic ......................................................... 232-3 Conditional Statements ............................ 252-4 Deductive Reasoning ............................... 272-5 Postulates and Paragraph Proofs ............ 292-6 Algebraic Proof ......................................... 312-7 Proving Segment Relationships ............... 332-8 Proving Angle Relationships .................... 35Tie It Together ................................................ 37Before the Test .............................................. 38
Chapter 3Before You Read ........................................... 39Key Points ...................................................... 403-1 Parallel Lines and Transversals ............... 413-2 Angles and Parallel Lines ......................... 433-3 Slopes of Lines ......................................... 453-4 Equations of Lines .................................... 473-5 Proving Lines Parallel ............................... 493-6 Perpendiculars and Distance ................... 51Tie It Together ................................................ 53Before the Test .............................................. 54
Chapter 4Before You Read ........................................... 55Key Points ...................................................... 564-1 Classifying Triangles ................................ 574-2 Angles of Triangles ................................... 594-3 Congruent Triangles ................................. 614-4 Proving Congruence: SSS, SAS .............. 634-5 Proving Congruence: ASA, AAS .............. 654-6 Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles ......... 674-7 Congruence Transformations ................... 694-8 Triangles and Coordinate Proof ............... 71Tie It Together ................................................ 73Before the Test .............................................. 74
Chapter 5Before You Read ........................................... 75Key Points ...................................................... 765-1 Bisectors of Triangles ............................... 775-2 Medians and Altitudes of Triangles .......... 795-3 Inequalities in One Triangle ..................... 815-4 Indirect Proof ............................................ 835-5 The Triangle Inequality ............................. 855-6 Inequalities in Two Triangles .................... 87Tie It Together ................................................ 89Before the Test .............................................. 90
Chapter 6Before You Read ........................................... 91Key Points ...................................................... 926-1 Angles of Polygons ................................... 936-2 Parallelograms .......................................... 956-3 Tests for Parallelograms .......................... 976-4 Rectangles ................................................ 996-5 Rhombi and Squares .............................. 1016-6 Kites and Trapezoids .............................. 103Tie It Together .............................................. 105Before the Test ............................................ 106
Chapter 7Before You Read ......................................... 107Key Points .................................................... 1087-1 Ratios and Proportions ........................... 1097-2 Similar Polygons ..................................... 1117-3 Similar Triangles ..................................... 1137-4 Parallel Lines and Proportional
Parts ....................................................... 1157-5 Parts of Similar Triangles ....................... 1177-6 Similarity Transformations ...................... 1197-7 Scale Drawings and Models ................... 121Tie It Together .............................................. 123Before the Test ............................................ 124
Chapter 8Before You Read ......................................... 125Key Points .................................................... 1268-1 Geometric Mean ..................................... 1278-2 The Pythagorean Theorem and Its
Converse ................................................ 1298-3 Special Right Triangles .......................... 1318-4 Trigonometry .......................................... 1338-5 Angles of Elevation and Depression ...... 1358-6 The Law of Sines and Cosines .............. 1378-7 Vectors ................................................... 139Tie It Together .............................................. 141Before the Test ............................................ 142
ContentsC
opyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
PDF Pass0ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in3 30ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in3 3 6/11/08 2:11:38 AM6/11/08 2:11:38 AM
iv
Chapter 9Before You Read ......................................... 143Key Points .................................................... 1449-1 Refl ections .............................................. 1459-2 Translations ............................................ 1479-3 Rotations ................................................ 1499-4 Compositions of Transformations ........... 1519-5 Symmetry ............................................... 1539-6 Dilations .................................................. 155Tie It Together .............................................. 157Before the Test ............................................ 158
Chapter 10Before You Read ......................................... 159Key Points .................................................... 16010-1 Circles and Circumference ................... 16110-2 Measuring Angles and Arcs ................. 16310-3 Arcs and Chords ................................... 16510-4 Inscribed Angles ................................... 16710-5 Tangents ............................................... 16910-6 Secants, Tangents, and Angle
Measures .............................................. 17110-7 Special Segments in a Circle ............... 17310-8 Equations of Circles ............................. 175Tie It Together .............................................. 177Before the Test ............................................ 178
Chapter 11Before You Read ......................................... 179Key Points .................................................... 18011-1 Areas of Parallelograms and
Triangles ............................................... 18111-2 Areas of Trapezoids, Rhombi
and Kites .............................................. 18311-3 Areas of Circles and Sectors ................ 18511-4 Areas of Regular Polygons and
Composite Figures ............................... 18711-5 Areas of Similar Figures ....................... 189Tie It Together .............................................. 191Before the Test ............................................ 192
Chapter 12Before You Read ......................................... 193Key Points .................................................... 19412-1 Representations of
Three-Dimensional Figures .................. 19512-2 Surface Areas of Prisms and
Cylinders ............................................... 19712-3 Surface Areas of Pyramids and
Cones ................................................... 19912-4 Volumes of Prisms and Cylinders ........ 20112-5 Volumes of Pyramids and Cones ......... 20312-6 Surface Areas and Volumes
of Spheres ............................................ 20512-7 Spherical Geometry .............................. 20712-8 Congruent and Similar Solids ............... 209Tie It Together .............................................. 211Before the Test ............................................ 212
Chapter 13Before You Read ......................................... 213Key Points .................................................... 21413-1 Representing Sample Spaces .............. 21513-2 Permutations and Combinations .......... 21713-3 Geometric Probability ........................... 21913-4 Simulations ........................................... 22113-5 Probabilities of Independent and
Dependent Events ................................ 22313-6 Probabilities of Mutually Exclusive
Events ................................................... 225Tie It Together .............................................. 227Before the Test ............................................ 228
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
PDF Pass0ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in4 40ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in4 4 6/11/08 2:11:49 AM6/11/08 2:11:49 AM
v
Note-Taking TipsNote-Taking TipsYour notes are a reminder of what you learned in class. Taking good notes can help you succeed in mathematics. The following tips will help you take better classroom notes.
• Before class, ask what your teacher will be discussing in class. Review mentally what you already know about the concept.
• Be an active listener. Focus on what your teacher is saying. Listen for important concepts. Pay attention to words, examples, and/or diagrams your teacher emphasizes.
• Write your notes as clear and concise as possible. The following symbols and abbreviations may be helpful in your note-taking.
Word or Phrase
Symbol or Abbreviation
Word or Phrase
Symbol or Abbreviation
for example e.g. not equal ≠
such as i.e. approximately ≈
with w/ therefore ∴
without w/o versus vs
and + angle ∠
• Use a symbol such as a star (�) or an asterisk (∗) to emphasis important concepts. Place a question mark (?) next to anything that you do not understand.
• Ask questions and participate in class discussion.
• Draw and label pictures or diagrams to help clarify a concept.
• When working out an example, write what you are doing to solve the problem next to each step. Be sure to use your own words.
• Review your notes as soon as possible after class. During this time, organize and summarize new concepts and clarify misunderstandings.
Note-Taking Don’tsNote-Taking Don’ts
• Don’t write every word. Concentrate on the main ideas and concepts.
• Don’t use someone else’s notes as they may not make sense.
• Don’t doodle. It distracts you from listening actively.
• Don’t lose focus or you will become lost in your note-taking.
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
PDF Pass0ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in5 50ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in5 5 6/11/08 2:12:00 AM6/11/08 2:12:00 AM
PDF Pass0ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in6 60ii_0vi_GEOSN_BKFM_TAE_890858.in6 6 6/11/08 2:12:10 AM6/11/08 2:12:10 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 1 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, respond to these statements.1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When taking notes, summarize the main ideas presented in the lesson. Summaries are useful for condensing data and realizing what is important.
• When you take notes, write descriptive paragraphs about your learning experiences.
The Tools of Geometry
Before You Read The Tools of Geometry
See students’ work.
• Collinear points are lines that run through the same point.
• Line segments that are congruent have the same measure.
• Distance on a coordinate plane is calculated using a form of the Pythagorean Theorem.
• The Midpoint Formula can be used to find the coordinates of the endpoint of a segment.
• The formula to find the area of a circle is A = πr2.
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd 1001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd 1 6/14/08 12:46:05 AM6/14/08 12:46:05 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 2 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on linear measure, one fact might be that unlike a line, a line segment can be measured because it has two endpoints. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Lesson Fact
1-1 Points, Lines, and Planes See students’ work.
1-2 Linear Measure
1-3 Distance and Midpoints
1-4 Angle Measure
1-5 Angle Relationship
1-6 Two-Dimensional Figures
1-7 Three-Dimensional Figures
The Tools of Geometry
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd 2001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd 2 6/14/08 12:46:12 AM6/14/08 12:46:12 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Points, Lines, and Planes1-1
Less
on
1-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 3 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 1-1. Write two facts you learned about points, lines, and planes as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: A line does not have thickness or1. ____________________________________________________
width. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Collinear points are points on the2. ____________________________________________________
same line. ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
can only be explained using examples and descriptions————————————————————————————
a location that has neither shape nor size————————————————————————————
made up of points and has no thickness or width————————————————————————————
flat surface made up of points that extends————————————————————————————
indefinitely in all directions————————————————————————————
points that lie on the same line————————————————————————————
points that lie on the same plane————————————————————————————
the set of points that two or more geometric figures————————————————————————————
have in common————————————————————————————
can be explained using undefined terms and/or other————————————————————————————
defined terms————————————————————————————
a boundless, three-dimensional set of all points————————————————————————————
undefined term
point
line
plane
collinear
coplanar
intersection
definition/defined term
space
Active Vocabulary
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 3003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 3 6/6/08 4:01:44 PM6/6/08 4:01:44 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 4 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Model a point, line, and plane with a representative drawing. Label your drawing.
Compare undefined and defined terms by completing the table. Provide definitions and examples.
Points, Lines, and Planespp. 5–6
Intersections of Lines and Planespp. 6–7
linepoint
plane
Sample answers:
•
Term Definition Examples
defined term
explained using undefined terms or other defined terms; same as definition
space, intersection, collinear, coplanar, intersection
undefi ned term
can only be explained using examples and descriptions
points, lines, planes
Helping You Remember Recall or look in a dictionary for the meaning of the prefix co-. What does the prefix mean? How can it help you remember the meaning of collinear?
Sample answer: joint or working together; two or more points together —————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 4003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 4 6/6/08 4:01:51 PM6/6/08 4:01:51 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Linear Measure1-2
Less
on
1-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 5 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in this lesson.
Sample answer: how to measure segments1.
Sample answer: how to calculate with measures2.
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
Between any two on a line there is another
.
a portion of a with two
point A is between two other points, B and C; A, B, and C
are on the same line, and + =
method of creating without
two with the same
Vocabulary Link Congruent segments can be illustrated by real-world examples. Consider opposite sides of this book. The lines are the same size. Write some real-world examples of other congruent segments.
Sample answer: railroad tracks, edges of picture————————————————————————————
frame————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
betweenness of points
line segment
between
construction
congruent segment
Active Vocabulary
point
line endpoints
AB AC BC
measuring tools
segments measures
geometric figures
points
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 5003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 5 6/6/08 7:56:18 PM6/6/08 7:56:18 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 6 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the model to fill in each blanks.
A B
1. Each inch is divided into _________.
2. Point B is closer to the ______ inch mark.
3. −−
AB is about ______ inches long.
Model the three types of methods to calculate measures of a line segment with an example.
Measure Line Segmentspp. 14–15
Calculate Measurespp. 15–17
eighths
1 3 −
8
1 3 −
8
Find measurements by subtracting.
Sample answer: number line with a smaller segment subtracted from a larger segment
Find measurements by writing and solving equations.
Sample answer: ST = 4x, SV = 5x - 3, TV = 15 Find the value of x and ST. 4x + 5x - 3 = 15 x = 2; ST = 8
Find measurements by adding.
Sample answer: number line with two segments that are equal to a longer segment
Helping You Remember Construction is a word used in everyday English as well as in mathematics. Look up construction in the dictionary. Explain how the everyday definition can help you remember how construction is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: The way in which something is put together; figures are put—————————————————————————————————————————
together just like buildings and structures.—————————————————————————————————————————
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 6003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 6 6/6/08 4:02:01 PM6/6/08 4:02:01 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Distance and Midpoints1-3
Less
on
1-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 7 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 1-3. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to find the distance between1. ____________________________________________________
two points ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the midpoint between2. ____________________________________________________
two points ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
the length of a segment with two endpoints————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
point that is halfway between the endpoints————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
segment, line, plane that intersects a segment at ————————————————————————————
its midpoint————————————————————————————
Vocabulary Link Midpoint can have non-mathematical meanings as well. Look up midpoint in the dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how midpoint is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: a point in time halfway between————————————————————————————
the beginning and end; a point halfway between————————————————————————————
two extremes ————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
distance
midpoint
segment bisector
Active Vocabulary
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 7003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 7 6/6/08 4:02:10 PM6/6/08 4:02:10 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 8 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Fill in the organizer for the distance formula on a number line and a coordinate plane with line segment AB, with endpoints (x1, y1) and (x2, y2).
Model the solution to find the distance between the points on the coordinate plane. Use the lines to show your calculations. Round to the nearest tenth if necessary.
(x1, y1) = (-5, 3) ; (x2, y2) = ( 2, 4 )
KL = √ ���������� (x2 - x
1) 2 + (y2 - y
1) 2
KL = √ ����������� (2 - (-5) ) 2 + (4 - 3) 2
KL = √ ��� 49 + 1
KL = √ �� 50 ≈ 7.1
Distance Between Two Pointspp. 25–26
Midpoint of a Segmentpp. 27–30
y
x
If a segment has endpoints with
coordinates (x1, y
1)
and (x2, y
2), you can
find the distance with the distance
formula.
Number Line
The distance between two points is the
absolute value of the difference between their coordinates.
Coordinate Plane
Distance Formula
Symbols
Words
AB = ⎪x1 - x
2⎥ or ⎪x2 - x
1⎥ AB = √ ��������� (x
2 - x
1)2 + (y
2 - y
1)2
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 8003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 8 6/6/08 7:59:19 PM6/6/08 7:59:19 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Angle Measure1-4
Less
on
1-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 9 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 1-4. Predict two things you think you will learn about angle measures.
Sample answer: how to measure angles1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to classify angles2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
angle with measure of 90º
where two rays meet to form an angle
angle with measure greater than 90º
a ray that divides an angle into two congruent angles
the region of a plane inside of an angle
angle with measure less than 90º
a ray that forms part of an angle
part of a line with one endpoint and one end that extends forever
formed by two noncollinear rays with a common endpoint
units used to measure angles
extend in two directions from a point on a line
the region of a plane outside of an angle
Active Vocabulary
right angle
vertex
obtuse angle
angle bisector
interior
acute angle
side
ray
angle
degree
opposite rays
exterior
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 9003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 9 6/6/08 4:02:21 PM6/6/08 4:02:21 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 10 Glencoe Geometry
Details
Summarize information about angles in the graphic organizer below.
1. Draw and label an obtuse, acute, and right angle.
2. Draw and label one angle that has these 3 names:∠B, ∠ABC, and ∠3.
Model a pair of congruent angles. Use a compass and straightedge.
Drawings will vary, but both angles have the same measure. Sample answer shown.
Measure and Classify Anglespp. 36–38
Congruent Anglespp. 39–40
Helping You Remember Compare and contrast congruent segments and congruent angles.
Sample answer: Congruent segments and congruent angles have the—————————————————————————————————————————
same measure. Segments have a linear measure. Angles are measured—————————————————————————————————————————
in degrees.—————————————————————————————————————————
Main Idea
acute obtuse
right
3
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 10003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 10 6/6/08 4:02:27 PM6/6/08 4:02:27 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Angle Relationships1-5
Less
on
1-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 11 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 1-5. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Special Pairs of Lines1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Perpendicular Lines2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Label the diagram with the correct terms. Use each term once.
Vocabulary Link Perpendicular has a nonmathematical meaning. Look up perpendicular in the dictionary. List at least five examples of things that are perpendicular in everyday life.
Sample answer: lines of corner of book, desk, room,————————————————————————————
refrigerator and floor, wall and ceiling————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
1
2 3
45
∠1 and ∠2 aresupplementary angles
and a linear pair.
Lines w and x areperpendicular.
∠4 and ∠5 arecomplementary anglesand adjacent angles.
∠1 and ∠3 arevertical angles.
x
w
adjacent
linear pair
vertical
complementary
supplementary
perpendicular
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 11003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 11 6/7/08 1:41:36 AM6/7/08 1:41:36 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 12 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Summarize angle relationships by completing the graphic organizer with the terms adjacent angles, complementary angles, vertical angles, and supplementary angles.
If m∠ABC = 2x + 12, find x so that ⎯⎯ � BC ⊥
⎯⎯ � BA .
= definition of perpendicular
= Simplify.
Pairs of Anglespp. 46–48
Perpendicular Linespp. 48–50
2x + 12 90
x
relationship due to positioning
relationship due to angle measures
adjacent angles
vertical angles
Special angle pairs
complementaryangles
supplementary angles
39
Helping You Remember Look up the nonmathematical meaning of supplementary in a dictionary. How can this definition help you to remember the meaning of supplementary angles?
Sample answer: something added to complete a deficiency; two angles added—————————————————————————————————————————
together to be a complete line—————————————————————————————————————————
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 12003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 12 6/7/08 1:42:23 AM6/7/08 1:42:23 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Less
on
1-6
Two-Dimensional Figures1-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 13 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about two-dimensional figures.
Sample answer: Polygons are two-dimensional1. ____________________________________________________
figures. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Perimeter and area of 2. ____________________________________________________
two-dimensional figures can be found. ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write each term next to its definition.
where two sides of a polygon intersect
polygon with no side that passes through the figure’s interior
a convex polygon that is equilateral and equiangular
a polygon where all angles are congruent
perimeter of a circle
a polygon with n number of sides
closed figure formed by coplanar segments where two segments intersect at a common noncollinear endpoint
polygon with some side that passes through the figure’s interior
a polygon where all sides are congruent
sum of the lengths of a polygon’s sides
number of square units needed to cover a surface
Active Vocabulary
vertex of polygon
convex
regular polygon
equiangular polygon
circumference
n-gon
polygon
concave
equilateral polygon
perimeter
area
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 13003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 13 6/6/08 4:02:43 PM6/6/08 4:02:43 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 14 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea
Identify Polygonspp. 56–57
Perimeter, Circumference, and Areapp. 58–60
Details
Fill in the organizer about polygons.
What is a polygon?• noncollinear vertices
• closed figure
• made of coplanar segments
What is not a polygon?• open
• curved sides
• intersecting segments
Examples Nonexamples
Summarize the formulas for perimeter, circumference, and area of the figures by completing the chart.
Polygons
Area A = 1 − 2 bh A = s2 A = ℓ × w πr2
Perimeter P = a + b + c P = 4s P = 2ℓ + 2wsame as
circumfer-ence
Circumference n/a n/a n/aC =πd or C = 2πr
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 14003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 14 6/6/08 4:02:46 PM6/6/08 4:02:46 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Three-Dimensional Figures1-7
Less
on
1-7
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 15 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 1-7. Write two facts you learned about three-dimensional figures.
Sample answer: A polyhedron is a solid with all1. ____________________________________________________
flat surfaces that enclose a single region or space. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: There are exactly five types of2. ____________________________________________________
regular polyhedron. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
polyhedron with two bases connected by————————————————————————————
parallelogram faces————————————————————————————
polyhedron with a polygonal base and three or more————————————————————————————
triangular faces that meet at a common vertex————————————————————————————
solid with congruent parallel circular bases and————————————————————————————
curved side————————————————————————————
parallel, congruent faces that intersect faces————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
solid with a circular base connected by a curved ————————————————————————————
surface to a single vertex ————————————————————————————
set of points equidistant from a given point————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
prism
pyramid
cylinder
base
cone
sphere
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 15003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 15 6/6/08 4:02:50 PM6/6/08 4:02:50 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 1-7 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 16 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the concept circle by drawing in a fourth example. Then state the relationship of the 4 figures on the line below the concept circle.
The relationship is: All are prisms.————————————————————————————
Organize information about volume and surface area in the chart.
Figure
Surface Area
T = Ph +
2B
T = 1 − 2 Pℓ
+ B
T = 2πrh + 2πr 2
T = πrℓ + πr 2
T =
4πr 2
Volume V = Bh V = 1 − 3 bh V = πr2h V =
1 −
3 πr 2h
V = 4 − 3
πr3
Identify Three-Dimensional Figurespp. 67–68
Surface Area and Volumepp. 69–70
Drawingswill vary;must be aprism.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember the characteristics of geometric solids is to think of how different solids are alike. Name a way which pyramids and cones are alike.
Sample answer: Pyramids and cones both have one common vertex in which —————————————————————————————————————————
the sides or faces are attached.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 16003_016_GEOSNC01_890858.indd 16 6/6/08 4:02:57 PM6/6/08 4:02:57 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 17 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a term or formula from the chapter.
The Tools of Geometry
Vertical
ComplementaryLinear Pair
SupplementaryAdjacent Angle Pairs
Angle
Right
Obtuse
Acute
LinePoint Plane
Basic Geometry
3D Figures
Cylinder Cone
Sphere
Polyhedron
Prism
Pyramid
Volume
Surface Area
Perpendicular
Perimeter
Area Polygons
Equilateral Equiangular
Midpoint Formula
( (x1 + x
2) −
2 ,
(y1 + y
2) −
2 )
Length/Distance Formula
d = √ ��������� (x2 - x
1) + (y
2 - y
1)
Segment
Regular
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd 17001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd 17 6/14/08 12:43:02 AM6/14/08 12:43:02 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 1 18 Glencoe Geometry
Now that you have read and worked through the chapter, think about what you have learned and complete the table below. Compare your previous answers with these.
1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 1.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 1 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 1 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Make a calendar that includes all of your daily classes. Besides writing down all
assignments and due dates, include in your daily schedule time to study, work on projects, and reviewing notes you took during class that day.
The Tools of Geometry
The Tools of Geometry After You Read
• Collinear points are lines that run through the same point.
D
• Line segments that are congruent have the same measure.
A
• Distance on a coordinate plane is calculated using a form of the Pythagorean Theorem.
A
• The Midpoint Formula can be used to find the coordinates of the endpoint of a segment.
A
• The formula to find the area of a circle is A = πr2.A
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd 18001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd 18 6/14/08 12:43:14 AM6/14/08 12:43:14 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 19 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, respond to these statements.1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, you may wish to use a highlighting marker to emphasize
important concepts.
• When you take notes, think about the order in which the concepts are being presented.
Write why you think the concepts were presented in this sequence.
Before You Read Reasoning and Proof
See students’ work. • Listing a counterexample is a method
to prove a conjecture is true.
• A Venn diagram can illustrate a conjunction.
• A form of inductive reasoning is the Law of Detachment.
• The statement a line contains two points, is an example of a postulate.
• Supplementary angles have measures whose sum is 90º.
Reasoning and Proof
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec1:19001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec1:19 6/14/08 12:46:18 AM6/14/08 12:46:18 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 20 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on inductive reasoning and conjecture, one fact might be a concluding statement reached using inductive reasoning is called a conjecture. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Lesson Fact
2-1 Inductive Reasoning and Conjecture See students’ work.
2-2 Logic
2-3 Conditional Statements
2-4 Deductive Reasoning
2-5 Postulates and Paragraph Proofs
2-6 Algebraic Proof
2-7 Proving Segment Relationships
2-8 Proving Angle Relationships
The Reasoning and Proof
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec1:20001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec1:20 6/14/08 12:46:25 AM6/14/08 12:46:25 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-1
NAME DATE PERIOD
Inductive Reasoning and Conjecture2-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 21 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 2-1. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Making Conjectures1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Finding Counterexamples2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
____________ that uses a number of specific ___________ to
arrive at a _____________
the _____________ that is reached within inductive reasoning
an example that ____________ a ____________
Vocabulary Link Conjecture is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of conjecture using a dictionary. Write how the definition of conjecture can help you remember the mathematical definition of conjecture.
Sample answer: an expression of an opinion; ————————————————————————————
A conclusion about a statement is also an expression————————————————————————————
of an opinion.————————————————————————————
inductive reasoning
conjecture
counterexample
reasoning
conclusion
examples
conclusion
disproves conjecture
Active Vocabulary
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 21021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 21 6/6/08 8:04:33 PM6/6/08 8:04:33 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 22 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea
Make Conjecturespp. 89–91
Find Counterexamplesp. 92
Details
Sequence the steps of making a conjecture with algebraic terms or geometric terms.
Write a statement in which you can make a true conjecture. Then write another statement in which you can make a false conjecture. Provide a counterexample of the false conjecture.
True Conjecture: Sample answer: The product of two
odd numbers is an even number.
False Conjecture: Sample answer: The product of a
negative number and a positive number is a positive
number. Sample answer: -4 � 5 = -20
Make a conjecture.
Test the conjecture.
Ensure all consecutive
terms follow the
same repeating
operation or attribute.
Look for operations or
attributes that repeat.
Helping You Remember Write a short sentence that can help you remember why it only takes one counterexample to prove that a conjecture is false.
Sample answer: A conjecture must be true in all cases, so one counterexample—————————————————————————————————————————
is enough to disprove a conjecture.—————————————————————————————————————————
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 22021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 22 6/6/08 8:09:10 PM6/6/08 8:09:10 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-2
NAME DATE PERIOD
Logic2-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 23 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 2-2. Predict two things you think you will learn about logic.
Sample answer: how to identify the truth of a1. ____________________________________________________
statement ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use Venn diagrams2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Match the term with the correct definition by drawing a line between the two.
a sentence that is either true or false
two or more statements joined by and or or
a compound statement that uses the word or
the value of a statement as either true or false
statement with the opposite meaning and opposite truth
a compound statement that uses the word and
convenient method to determine the truth value of statement
Vocabulary Link Negation is a word used in everyday English as well as in mathematics. Look up negation in the dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how negation is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: denying; Negation denies the truth of————————————————————————————
a statement.————————————————————————————
truth table
disjunction
statement
truth value
conjunction
negation
compound statement
Active Vocabulary
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 23021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 23 6/6/08 4:04:42 PM6/6/08 4:04:42 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 24 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Fill in the blanks to summarize negations, conjunctions, and disjunctions. Write a description of each term.
Model the situation using a Venn diagram.At Terrace Middle school, 68 students play basketball, 77 play volleyball, 19 play soccer and basketball, and 27 play all three sports. If 13 students play both volleyball and basketball, how many students play just basketball? 9
Volleyball Soccer
Determine Truth Valuespp. 97–99
Venn Diagramspp. 99–100
truth value____________
disjunction____________
negation__________
conjunction____________
9
13 27 19
Basketball
Helping You Remember Prefixes can often help you remember the meaning of words or distinguish between similar words. Use your dictionary to find the meanings of the prefixes con and dis and explain how these meanings can help you remember the difference between a conjunction and disjunction.
Sample answer: Con means together, and dis means undo or do the————————————————————————————————————————
opposite. Together means and and opposite means or.————————————————————————————————————————
statement
compound
Statement
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 24021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 24 6/6/08 8:11:45 PM6/6/08 8:11:45 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-3
NAME DATE PERIOD
Conditional Statements2-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 25 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 2-3. Predict two things you will learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: definition of a conditional1. ____________________________________________________
statement ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: definition of hypothesis and2. ____________________________________________________
conclusion ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
a statement that can be written in if-then form————————————————————————————
in the form if p, then q————————————————————————————
formed by exchanging the hypothesis and conclusion————————————————————————————
of the conditional————————————————————————————
the phrase immediately following the word if in a————————————————————————————
conditional statement————————————————————————————
formed by negating both the hypothesis and————————————————————————————
conclusion of the conditional————————————————————————————
formed by negating both the hypothesis and————————————————————————————
conclusion of the converse of the conditional————————————————————————————
statements with the same truth value————————————————————————————
other statements based on a given conditional————————————————————————————
statement————————————————————————————
the phrase immediately following the word then in a————————————————————————————
conditional statement————————————————————————————
conditional statement
if-then statement
converse
hypothesis
inverse
contrapositive
logically equivalent
related conditionals
conclusion
Active Vocabulary
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 25021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 25 6/6/08 4:04:49 PM6/6/08 4:04:49 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 26 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Identify the hypothesis and conclusion of each conditional statement. Circle the hypothesis and underline the conclusion.
1. A number is divisible by 9 if the sum of its digits isdivisible by 9.
2. If the measure of an angle is less than 90 degrees, it is an acute angle.
Fill in the organizer for related conditionals.
If-Then Statementspp. 105–107
Related Conditionalspp. 107–108
Conditional Statements
Symbols: -q → -p
Words: ___________________________________if not q then not p
contrapositive;Symbols: q → p
Words: ______________________if q then p
converse;
Symbols: p → q
Words: ____________________________________
conditional
statement; if p then q
Symbols: -p → -q
Words: ______________________________
inverse;
if not p then not q
Helping You Remember When working with a conditional statement and its three related conditional, what is an easy way to remember which statements are logically equivalent?
Sample answer: The two terms that contain verse (converse and inverse) are—————————————————————————————————————————
logically equivalent. The other two terms are also logically equivalent.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 26021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 26 6/6/08 4:04:54 PM6/6/08 4:04:54 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-4
NAME DATE PERIOD
Deductive Reasoning2-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 27 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 2-4. Write two facts you learned about deductive reasoning as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: Deductive reasoning uses facts,1. ____________________________________________________
rules, definitions, or properties to reach logical ____________________________________________________
conclusions. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: One valid form of deductive2. ____________________________________________________
reasoning is the Law of Detachment. ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
allows you to draw conclusions from two true conditional statements when the conclusion of one statement is the hypothesis of the other
uses facts, rules, definitions, or properties to reach logical conclusions from given statements
form of deductive reasoning that states that if all the facts are true, then the conclusion reached is also true
Vocabulary Link Syllogism is a word used in everyday English as well as in mathematics. Look up syllogism in the dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how syllogism is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: logic; consists of major, minor————————————————————————————
premise, and conclusion; is analogy to drawing————————————————————————————
conclusion based on two true conditional statements————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
_______________________
_______________________
_______________________
Law of Syllogism
deductive reasoning
Law of Detachment
Active Vocabulary
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 27021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 27 6/6/08 4:04:57 PM6/6/08 4:04:57 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 28 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Identity the steps to validate the two conclusions by completing the graphic organizer.
Match the portions of each statement with the correct term by drawing a line to connect the two. Then write the true conditional statement and the valid conclusion using the Law of Syllogism.
p you buy bread
q you walk to the store
r you can make toast
If you walk to the store, you can buy bread. If you buy————————————————————————————
bread, you can make toast.————————————————————————————
Law of Detachment pp. 115–117
Law of Syllogismpp. 117–118
If the light bulb is broken, the lamp will not work. Jackson’s lamp will not work.Jackson’s light bulb is broken.
Identify the hypothesis.The light bulb is broken.
Identify the conclusion.The lamp will not work.
Analyze the conclusion.Jackson’s light bulb is broken. Invalid; the lamp could be broken.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to explain it to someone else. Suppose that a classmate is having trouble remembering the Law of Detachment. In your own words, explain what the Law of Detachment means?
Sample answer: a logical argument where if the first and second statements—————————————————————————————————————————
are true, you can conclude that a third statement connecting the two true—————————————————————————————————————————
statements is true—————————————————————————————————————————
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 28021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 28 6/6/08 4:05:03 PM6/6/08 4:05:03 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-5
NAME DATE PERIOD
Postulates and Paragraph Proofs2-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 29 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in this lesson.
Sample answer: using basic postulates about1. ____________________________________________________
points, lines, and planes ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: writing paragraph proofs2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
a that is accepted as without
a logical in which each statement you make is
by a statement that is as
a logical of that link the
to what you are trying to prove
a or conjecture that has been
writing a to explain why a for a
given situation is
same as __________________
same as
postulate
proof
deductive argument
theorem
paragraph proof
informal proof
axiom
Active Vocabulary
statement true
proof
argument
supported accepted
true
chain statements
given
provenstatement
paragraph conjecture
true
paragraph proof
postulate
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 29021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 29 6/6/08 4:05:06 PM6/6/08 4:05:06 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 30 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Write a postulate of points, lines, and planes. Then model the postulate.
Through any three noncollinear points, there is————————————————————————————
exactly one plane. ————————————————————————————
Sequence the steps in the proof process by completing the organizer.
Steps in the Proof Process
Points, Lines, and Planespp. 125–126
Paragraph Proofs pp. 126–127
Sample answer:
Step 1: List the ___________________; draw a ________
if possible.
given information picture
Step 2: State the _________ or conjecture to
be ________.
theorem
proven
Step 3: Create a _____________________ by forming
a _____________ of statements linking the given to what you are trying to prove.
deductive argument
logical chain
Step 4: Justify each ____________ with a reason.
Reasons include definitions, algebraic ____________,
postulates, and ___________.
statement
properties
theorems
Step 5: State what has been ________.proven
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 30021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 30 6/6/08 4:05:18 PM6/6/08 4:05:18 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-6
NAME DATE PERIOD
Algebraic Proof2-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 31 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about algebraic proof.
Sample answer: properties of real numbers1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to solve an equation2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term. (Lesson 2-4)
uses facts, rules, definitions, and properties to reach————————————————————————————
logical conclusions from given statements————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the term.
same as formal proof
contains statements and reasons in two columns
uses a group of algebraic steps to solve problems and justify each step.
Vocabulary Link Proof is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of proof using a dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how proof is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: evidence sufficient enough to————————————————————————————
establish something as true; Evidence is the same as————————————————————————————
justification with postulates.————————————————————————————
deductive reasoning
algebraic proof
two-column proof
formal proof
Active Vocabulary
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 31021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 31 6/6/08 8:12:56 PM6/6/08 8:12:56 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 32 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Write a 2-column proof by completing each step.
Given: 8 − 3 + x = 6 - 1 − 3 x Prove: x = 2 1 − 2
Match the property with its example by drawing a line to connect the example.
Symmetric Property If ST = WX, and WX = YZ, then ST = YZ.
Reflective Property If ∠C = ∠D, then ∠D = ∠C.
Transitive Property ∠A = ∠A
Algebraic Proofpp. 134–135
Geometric Proofp. 136
Statements Reasons
8 − 3 + x = 6 - 1 −
3 x Given
3 ( 8 − 3 + x) = 3 (6 - 1 −
3 x) Multiplication Prop of
Equality
8 + 3x = 18 - x Distributive Property
8 + 3x + x = 18 - x + x Addition Prop of Equality
8 + 4x = 18 Simplify.
8 + 4x - 8 = 18 - 8 Subtraction Prop of Equality
4x = 10 Substitution Prop of Equality
4 − 4 x = 10 −
4 Division Prop of Equality
x = 10 − 4 or 2 1 −
2 Substitution Prop of
Equality
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 32021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 32 6/6/08 4:05:25 PM6/6/08 4:05:25 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-7
NAME DATE PERIOD
Proving Segment Relationships2-7
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 33 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 2-7. Write two facts you learned about proving segment relationships.
Sample answer: You can use a ruler or segment1. ____________________________________________________
addition to show congruent segments. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: There are postulates about2. ____________________________________________________
congruence segments. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term. (Lessons 2-1 and 2-3)
reasoning that uses a number of specific examples to————————————————————————————
arrive at a conclusion————————————————————————————
the conclusion that is reached within inductive————————————————————————————
reasoning————————————————————————————
an example that disproves a conjecture————————————————————————————
a statement that can be written in if-then form————————————————————————————
formed by exchanging the hypothesis and conclusion————————————————————————————
of the conditional————————————————————————————
formed by negating both the hypothesis and————————————————————————————
conclusion of the converse of the conditional————————————————————————————
formed by negating both the hypothesis and————————————————————————————
conclusion of the conditional————————————————————————————
inductive reasoning
conjecture
counterexample
conditional statement
converse
contrapositive
inverse
Active Vocabulary
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 33021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 33 6/6/08 4:05:29 PM6/6/08 4:05:29 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-7 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 34 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the Model and Fill in each blank to summarize the Segment Addition Postulate.
If P, Q, and R are __________, then point __ is between __
and __ if and only if ____ + ____ = PR.
Complete the graphic organizer to prove the statement below.
Given: −−−
QR � −−
ST ; −−
ST � −−−
UV Prove: −−−
QR � −−−
UV
Ruler Postulatepp. 142–143
Segment Congruencepp. 143–144
collinear Q P
R PQ QR
−−−
QR � −−
ST and −−
ST � −−−
UV
QR = ST and ST = UVby the
____________________.congruence
definition of
QR = UV by the____________________________________.PropertyTransitive
−− QR �
−−− UV by the
.of congruence
definition
Helping You Remember A good way to keep the names straight in your mind is to associate something in the name of the postulate with the content of the postulate. How can you use this idea to distinguish between the Rule Postulate and the Segment Addition Postulate?
Sample answer: There are two words in Ruler Postulate, and three words in—————————————————————————————————————————
Segment Addition Postulate. Ruler Postulate has two points in the statement,—————————————————————————————————————————
and Segment Addition Postulate mentions three points.—————————————————————————————————————————
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 34021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 34 6/6/08 4:05:33 PM6/6/08 4:05:33 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
2-8
NAME DATE PERIOD
Proving Angle Relationships2-8
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 35 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 2-8. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Supplementary and1. ____________________________________________________
Complementary Angles ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Congruent Right Angles 2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 1-4 and 1-5)
two __________ angles with measures that have a sum of
_____________
angles with a common ______
two __________ angles with measures that have a sum of
______________
the region of a plane _______ an angle
the region of a plane _________ an angle
an angle with a measure of _______________________
an angle with a measure of _________________________
complementary angles
adjacent angles
supplemetary angles
interior
exterior
acute angle
obtuse angle
adjacent
90 degrees
side
180
inside
outside
less than 90 degrees
Active Vocabulary
adjacent
degrees
greater than 90 degrees
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 35021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 35 6/6/08 4:05:37 PM6/6/08 4:05:37 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 2-8 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 36 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Compare and contrast the Angle Addition Postulate and the Segment Addition Postulate by completing the Venn diagram.
Write a two-column proof to prove the statement by completing the chart.Given: m∠2 = 90 ∠1 � ∠3Prove: m∠1 = 45
Supplementary and Complementary Anglespp. 149–150
Congruent Anglespp. 151–153
Segment Addition PostulateAngle Addition Postulate
add adjacent angles
add collinear segments
sum of parts is measure of larger figure
Statements Reasons
1. m∠2 = 90∠1 � ∠3 1. Given
2. m∠3 = m∠1 2. Definition of congruent
3. m∠1 + m∠3 + m∠2 = 180
3. Definition of complementary angles
4. m∠1 + m∠1 + 90 = 180 4. Substitution
5. m∠1 + m∠3 + 90 – 90 = 180 – 90 5. Subtraction Property
6. m∠1 + m∠1 = 90 6. Substitution
7. m∠1 + m∠1 − 2 = 90 ÷ 2 7. Division Property
8. m∠1 = 45 8. Substitution
1 2 3
021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 36021-036_GEOSNC02_890858.indd 36 6/6/08 4:05:40 PM6/6/08 4:05:40 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 37 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a term from the chapter.
Reasoning and Proof
the process of justifying algebraic steps with
properties of real numbersalgebraic proof
the process of justifying geometric statements with
postulates or theoresgeometric proof
If p -> q is a true statement, and p is true, then q is true.Law of Detachment
If p -> q and q -> r, then p -> r.Law of Syllogism
the process of justifying statements with
previously accepted statements
deductive reasoningthe process of
justifying statements based on past observations
inductive reasoning
Logic
Statements
p ∧ qconjunction
q ∨ pdisjunction
…ThenconclusionIf-Then Statements p -> q
conditional statements
q -> pconverse
~q -> ~pcontrapositive
~p -> pinverse
If…hypothesis
~pnegation
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec1:37001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec1:37 6/14/08 12:43:26 AM6/14/08 12:43:26 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 2 38 Glencoe Geometry
Now that you have read and worked through the chapter, think about what you have learned and complete the table below. Compare your previous answers with these.
1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 2.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 2 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 2 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Make up acronyms to remember lists or sequences. PEMDAS is one acronym for
remembering the order of operations (parentheses, exponents, multiply and divide, add and subtract). (Please Excuse My Dear Aunt Sally).
Reasoning and Proof After You Read
• Listing a counterexample is a method to prove a conjecture is true.
D
• A Venn diagram can illustrate a conjunction. A
• A form of inductive reasoning is the Law of Detachment. D
• The statement a line contains two points, is an example of a postulate.
A
• Supplementary angles have measures whose sum is 90°.D
Reasoning and Proof
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec1:38001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec1:38 6/14/08 1:33:38 AM6/14/08 1:33:38 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 39 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about the topic. List three things you already know about parallel and perpendicular lines in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about them in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, preview the lesson and make generalizations about what
you think you will learn. Then compare that with what you actually learned after each lesson.
• Before each lesson, skim through the lesson and write any questions that come to mind in your notes.
As you work through the lesson, record the answer to your question.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
Parallel and Perpendicular Lines
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec2:39001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec2:39 6/14/08 12:46:34 AM6/14/08 12:46:34 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 40 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on parallel lines and transversals, one fact might be parallel planes are planes that do not intersect. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Parallel and Perpendicular Lines
Lesson Fact
3-1 Parallel Lines and Transversals See students’ work.
3-2 Angles and Parallel Lines
3-3 Adding and Subtracting Polynomials
3-4 Equations of Lines
3-5 Proving Lines Parallel
3-6 Perpendiculars and Distance
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec2:40001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec2:40 6/14/08 12:46:40 AM6/14/08 12:46:40 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Parallel Lines and Transversals3-1
Less
on
3-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 41 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 3-1. Predict two things you think you will learn about parallel lines and transversals.
Sample answer: how to identify and classify 1. ____________________________________________________
parallels and transversals ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to classify angle pairs2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Use the figure to complete each statement.
∠ 2 and ∠ 7 are .
∠ 5 and ∠ 6 are .
Vocabulary Link Skew is a word used in everyday English as well as in mathematics. Look up skew in the dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how skew is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: turn aside or swerve; Skew lines look ————————————————————————————
like they turn aside from one another.————————————————————————————
parallel lines
transversal
interior angles
exterior angles
consecutive interior angles
alternative interior angles
alternate exterior angles
corresponding angles
Active Vocabularyt
a
b
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
∠ 1 and ∠ 7 are .exterior angles
t is a .transversal
∠ 2 and ∠ 6 are .corresponding angles
a and b are .parallel lines
∠ 4 and ∠ 6 are .consecutive interior angles
alternate exterior angles
interior angles
∠ 4 and ∠ 5 are .alternate interior angles
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 41041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 41 6/6/08 4:17:49 PM6/6/08 4:17:49 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 3-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 42 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Summarize information about parallel lines and skew lines in the graphic organizer below.
Model a transversal t which intersects two or more parallel lines. Identify consecutive interior angles, alternative interior and exterior angles, and corresponding angles.consecutive interior angles: ∠ 3 and ∠ 5, ∠ 4 and ∠ 6alternate interior angles:∠ 3 and ∠ 6, ∠ 4 and ∠ 5alternate exterior angles:∠ 1 and ∠ 8, ∠ 2 and ∠ 7corresponding angles:∠ 1 and ∠ 5, ∠ 2 and ∠ 6,∠ 3 and ∠ 7, ∠ 4 and ∠ 8
Relationships Between Lines and Planespp. 171–172
Transversal Angle Pair Relationshipspp. 172–173
What are parallel lines?coplanar lines that do not intersect
How are parallel lines and skew lines similar?Both types of lines never intersect.Parallel
LinesHow are parallel lines and skew lines different?Parallel lines are on the same plane and there is a symbol, ||. Skew lines are on different planes and there is no symbol.
What are skew lines?noncoplanar lines that do not intersect
Skew Lines
t
a
b
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Helping You Remember Look up meaning of the prefix trans- in the dictionary. Write down 4 words that have trans- as a prefix. How can the meaning of the prefix help you remember the meaning of transversal?
Sample answer: Trans means across; transatlantic, Transamerica, transport, —————————————————————————————————————————
transparent; A transversal cuts across two or more parallel lines.—————————————————————————————————————————
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 42041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 42 6/6/08 4:17:53 PM6/6/08 4:17:53 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Angles and Parallel Lines3-2
Less
on
3-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 43 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 3-2. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this heading.
Sample answer: Parallel Lines and Angle Pairs 1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Algebra and Angle Measures2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Match the term with the correct definition by drawing a line between the two. (Lesson 3-1)
lie in the regions not between parallel lines that are cut by a transversal
a line that intersects 2 or more coplanar lines at 2 different points
lie on the same side of both the parallel lines and the transversal
coplanar lines that never intersect
lie between parallel lines that are cut by a transversal
interior lines that lie on the same side of a transversal
lines that are not on the same plane and never intersect
parallel lines
skew
interior angles
exterior angles
consecutive interior angles
corresponding angles
tranversal
Active Vocabulary
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 43041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 43 6/6/08 4:17:56 PM6/6/08 4:17:56 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 3-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 44 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea
NonexampleSample answer:
∠ 3 and ∠ 7 are not congruent because p and q are not parallel.
Details
Fill in the organizer about the Corresponding Angles Postulate.
Fill in each blank to summarize the Perpendicular Transversal Theorem.
The Perpendicular Transversal Theorem states that in a
, if a line is to one of two
, then it is to the other.
Parallel Lines and Angle Pairspp. 178–179
Algebra and Angle Measurespp. 180
Why is it useful?If you know an angle measure, you will know that the corresponding angle has the same measure. Consecutive interior angles will be supplementary.
DefinitionIf two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, each pair of corresponding angles is congruent.
ExampleSample answer:
∠ 3 � ∠ 7 because they are corresponding angles.
Corresponding Angles Postulate
t
p
q
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
t
p
q
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
plane perpendicular
parallel lines perpendicular
Helping You Remember How can you use an everyday meaning of the adjective alternate to help you remember the types of angle pairs for two lines and a transversal?
Sample answer: One definition of alternate says first on one side and then the —————————————————————————————————————————
other. Alternating angles occur on opposite sides of a transversal.—————————————————————————————————————————
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 44041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 44 6/6/08 4:18:00 PM6/6/08 4:18:00 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Slopes of Lines3-3
Less
on
3-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 45 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 3-3. Write two facts you learned about slopes of lines as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: Slopes can be positive, negative, 1. ____________________________________________________
zero, or undefined. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Parallel lines have equal slopes.2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lesson 1-1)
made up of with no thickness or width
a without shape or size
can be explained using terms
can only be explained using and
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
ratio of the change along the y-axis to the change ————————————————————————————
along the x-axis between any two points on the line————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
same as slope; describes how a quantity y changes in ————————————————————————————
relationship to a quantity x————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
line
point
defined term
undefined term
slope
rate of change
Active Vocabulary
points
location
undefined
examples descriptions
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 45041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 45 6/6/08 4:18:04 PM6/6/08 4:18:04 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 3-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 46 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the organizer to summarize the steps of finding the slope of a line. Then fill in each blank of the example.
Fill in each blank for the Parallel and Perpendicular Lines Postulates.
Slopes of Parallel Lines: Two non-vertical will
have the same if they are . Vertical lines
are parallel.
Slopes of Perpendicular Lines: Two
lines are if the of their
is . Vertical and horizontal lines are
perpendicular.
Slope of a Linepp. 186–188
Parallel and Perpendicular Linespp. 189–190
Step 1:Label the cordinates as
(x1, y
1) and (x
2, y
2).
Step 3: Simplify.
Find the Slope of a Line
Step 2:Substitute the
coordinates into the
m = y
2 - y
1 −
x2
- x1
slope formula.
54321
1 2 3 4 5-1-1-2-3-4-5
-2-3-4-5
x
y
Step 1: Substitute (-2, -1) for (x1, y1) and (2, 5) for (x2, y2).Step 2: Use the formula. Step 3: Simplify.
5 - (-1)
− 2 - (-2)
6 − 4 =
3 −
2
Find the slope of a line.
slope
lines
parallel
always
nonvertical
perpendicular product
slopes always
Helping You Remember Suppose 2 non-vertical lines have slopes which are reciprocals of each other. Are they perpendicular? Explain.
Sample answer: Reciprocals have a product of 1, not -1 so the lines are not —————————————————————————————————————————
perpendicular.—————————————————————————————————————————
-1
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 46041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 46 6/6/08 4:18:08 PM6/6/08 4:18:08 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Less
on
3-4
Equations of Lines 3-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 47 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 3-4. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept Box.
Sample answer: how to write equations of lines1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to solve real-world problems 2. ____________________________________________________
by writing equations ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two. (Lesson 2-5)
a logical chain of statements that link the given to what you are trying to prove
a statement or conjecture that has been proven
a logical argument in which each statement you make is supported by a statement that is accepted as true
a statement that is accepted as true without proof
New Vocabulary Write the correct equation next to each term.
Vocabulary Link Slope is a word used in everyday English as well as in mathematics. Look up slope in the dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how slope is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: steepness; The slope of a line is the ————————————————————————————
steepness of the line.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
postulate
proof
deductive argument
theorem
point-slope form
slope-intercept form
Active Vocabulary
y = mx + b
y - y1 = m(x - x
1)
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 47041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 47 6/6/08 4:18:12 PM6/6/08 4:18:12 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 3-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 48 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the chart on how to write an equation of a line.
Writing an Equation of a LineForms Procedures
Given: slope and y-intercept
Sample answer: Use slope-intercept form. Substitute m for slope and b for the y-intercept.
Given: slope and point on the line
Sample answer: Use point-slope form. Substitute m for slope and a point for (x
1, y
1)
and then solve for y.
Given: two points Sample answer: Use the slope formula to find m, then use point-slope form.
Given: for a horizontal line, when m = 0
Sample answer: Use the point-slope form where y = b.
Given: equation of one line and one set of points for ⊥ and ‖ lines
Sample answer: Solve the equation for y, then find m. Use the opposite reciprocal of m to write the equation.
Fill in each blank to write the equations.Alicia wants to paint for about 5 hours. One art studio charges an $8 fee plus $2 per hour. The second studio does not charge a fee and charges $4 an hour. Write two equations to represent the cost of each studio. Which studio should she choose?Fee + Hourly fee × x for Number of Hours = Total Cost
+ x = y
+ x = yThe studio charges a better deal for up to 4 hours.
Write Equations of Linespp. 196–198
Write Equations to Solve Problemsp. 199
8
0 4
2
first
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 48041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 48 6/6/08 4:18:15 PM6/6/08 4:18:15 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Proving Lines Parallel3-5
Less
on
3-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 49 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about proving lines parallel.
Sample answer: Parallel lines have the same 1. ____________________________________________________
slope. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Corresponding angles are 2. ____________________________________________________
congruent, so knowing their measures could ____________________________________________________
prove lines parallel. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lesson 3-1)
nonadjacent interior angles that lie on opposite sides of a transversal
nonadjacent exterior angles that lie on opposite sides of a transversal
angles that lie on the same side of the transversal and on the same side of parallel lines
coplanar lines that do not intersect
line that intersects two or more parallel lines at two different points
Where a transversal cuts through two parallel lines, these angles lie in the same region between parallel lines.
Where a transversal cuts through two parallel lines, these angles lie in the same two regions that are not between the two parallel lines.
Active Vocabulary
alternative interiorangles
alternate exteriorangles
corresponding angles
parallel lines
transversal
interior angles
exterior angles
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 49041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 49 6/6/08 8:19:11 PM6/6/08 8:19:11 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 3-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 50 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the model to cross out the congruence statement in the concept circle that does not belong.
Fill in each blank to summarize the lesson about proving lines are parallel.
When two lines are cut by a ,
the angle pairs formed are either or
. When a pair of lines form angles that
do not meet this condition, the lines be parallel.
Identify Parallel Linespp. 205–207
Prove Lines Parallelp. 208
1 3
5 7
2 4
6 8
∠1 � ∠8 ∠2 � ∠4
∠2 � ∠7∠6 � ∠7
parallel transversal
congruent
supplementary
cannot
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something new is to draw a picture. How can a sketch help you to remember the Parallel Postulate?
Sample answer: Draw a line with a ruler and choose a point not on the line. Try —————————————————————————————————————————
to draw lines through the point that are parallel, and you will see there is only —————————————————————————————————————————
one way to do this.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 50041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 50 6/6/08 8:21:33 PM6/6/08 8:21:33 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Less
on
3-6
Perpendiculars and Distance3-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 51 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in this lesson.
Sample answer: how to find the distance between 1. ____________________________________________________
a line and point ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the distance between 2. ____________________________________________________
parallel lines ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term. (Lesson 2-4)
collinear lines that never intersect————————————————————————————
noncoplanar lines that never intersect————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
The between two lines when
measured along a line to the lines is
always .
Vocabulary Link Equidistance is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of equidistance using a dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how equidistance is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: always the same distance; ————————————————————————————
Equidistance means the same thing in mathematics ————————————————————————————
and everyday life.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
parallel lines
skew
equidistance
Active Vocabulary
distance parallel
perpendicular
the same
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 51041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 51 6/6/08 4:18:26 PM6/6/08 4:18:26 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 3-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 52 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Summarize the steps to find the distance between a point p and a line ℓ on a coordinate plane.
Fill in each blank to find the distance between the parallel lines.
1. y = 3x – 7 The lines are units apart.
y = 3x + 4
2. y = –2x – 8 The lines are units apart.
y = –2x + 2
Distance from a Point to a Linepp. 213–216
Distance Between Parallel Linespp. 216–217
Find the Distance between a Point and a Line.
Step 1: Write an for the line ℓ.
Step 2: Write an for the perpendicular line
that goes through point p
Step 3: Use to find the
coordinates where line ℓ the perpendicular line.
Step 4: Use the to find the distance between point P and the point of intersection of the two lines.
equation
Distance Formula
equation
system of equation
11
10
Helping You Remember Use your dictionary to find the meaning of the Latin root aequus. List three words that are derived from this root and give meaning to each.
Sample answer: Aequus means even, fair, or equal. Equinox means one of the ————————————————————————————————————————
two times a year when day and night are of equal length. Equity means being ————————————————————————————————————————
just or fair. Equivalent means being equal in value or meaning.————————————————————————————————————————
intersects
041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 52041-052_GEOSNC03_890858.indd 52 6/6/08 4:18:29 PM6/6/08 4:18:29 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 53 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a term or formula from the chapter.
Parallel and Perpendicular Lines
lines slope
opposite
reciprocal
slopes
perpendicular
equal
slopes
parallel
vertical line
x = a
horizontal line
y = a
positive
negative
zero
undefined
perpendicular
coplanar lines that intersect to form a right angle
corresponding angles
parallel
coplanar lines that never intersect
alternate exterior angles
alternate interior angles
consecutive interior angles
skew lines
lines that never intersect and are not coplanar
equations
point-slope form
y - y1 = m(x - x
1)
slope-intercept form
y = mx + b y
x
y
x
y
x
y
x
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec2:53001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec2:53 6/14/08 12:43:35 AM6/14/08 12:43:35 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 3 54 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 3.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 3 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 3 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Designate a place to study at home that is free of clutter and distraction. Try to study at
about the same time each afternoon or evening so that it is part of your routine.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
Parallel and Perpendicular Lines
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec2:54001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec2:54 6/14/08 12:43:45 AM6/14/08 12:43:45 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 55 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about congruent triangles. List three things you already know about them in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about them in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • Remember to always take notes on your own. Don’t use someone else’s notes as they may not make sense.
• When you take notes, listen or read for main ideas. Then record those ideas in a simplified form for future reference.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
Congruent Triangles
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec3:55001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec3:55 6/14/08 12:46:45 AM6/14/08 12:46:45 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 56 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on congruent triangle, one fact might be that in two congruent triangles all of the side and angles of one triangle are congruent to the corresponding parts of the other triangle. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Congruent Triangles
Lesson Fact
4-1 Classifying Triangles See students’ work.
4-2 Angles of Triangles
4-3 Congruent Triangles
4-4 Proving Triangles Congruent–SSS, SAS
4-5 Proving Triangles Congruent –ASA, AAS
4-6 Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles
4-7 Congruence Transformations
4-8 Triangles and Coordinate Proof
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec3:56001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec3:56 6/14/08 12:46:52 AM6/14/08 12:46:52 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-1
NAME DATE PERIOD
Classifying Triangles4-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 57 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 4-1. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to classify triangles by their1. ____________________________________________________
sides ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to classify triangles by their2. ____________________________________________________
angles ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Label the diagram with the correct terms.
acute triangle
equiangular triangle
equilateral triangle
isosceles triangle
obtuse triangle
right triangle
scalene triangle
Active Vocabulary
58° 50°
72°
60°
60°60°
120°
13
11 7
isosceles triangle acute triangle right triangle
equiangular triangle obtuse triangle
scalene triangle equilateral triangle
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 57057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 57 6/7/08 2:59:45 PM6/7/08 2:59:45 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 58 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Classify the triangle below as acute, equiangular, obtuse, or right.
Classify each triangle below as equilateral, isosceles, or scalene.
Classify Triangles by Anglespp. 235–236
Classify Triangles by Sidespp. 236–237
90°
right triangle
2 in. 2 in.
2 in.
12 cm
12 cm
7 cm
isosceles equilateral
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical term is to relate it to a nonmathematical definition of the same word. How is the use of the word acute, when used to describe acute pain, related to the use of the word acute when used to describe an acute angle or an acute triangle?
Sample answer: An acute pain is a sharp, focused pain. An acute angle is less —————————————————————————————————————————
than 90˚, so you can think of it as a sharp, focused angle that is not spread out.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
noAcute: Does the triangle have 3
acute angles?
no
Equiangular: Does the triangle
have 3 congruent acute angles?
no
Obtuse: Does the triangle have an angle greater than 90˚?
yesRight: Does the triangle have 1
right angle?
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 58057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 58 6/7/08 2:59:50 PM6/7/08 2:59:50 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-2
NAME DATE PERIOD
Angles of Triangles4-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 59 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to apply the Triangle 1. ____________________________________________________
Angle-Sum Theorem ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to apply the Exterior Angle2. ____________________________________________________
Theorem ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
an extra line or segment drawn in a figure to help analyze geometric relationships
one of two angles inside a triangle that is not adjacent to an angle outside the triangle
an angle formed by one side of a triangle and the extension of an adjacent side
a method of showing statements to be true using boxes and arrows to show the logical progression of an argument
Vocabulary Link Auxiliary is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of auxiliary using a dictionary. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how auxiliary line is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: Auxiliary means offering or providing ————————————————————————————
help; giving assistance or support. So, it makes sense————————————————————————————
that an auxiliary line is a line drawn in a figure to————————————————————————————
help you analyze geometric relationships.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
remote interior angle
auxiliary line
exterior angle
flow proof
Active Vocabulary
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 59057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 59 6/7/08 2:59:53 PM6/7/08 2:59:53 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 60 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Fill in each box to complete the flow proof.Given: ∠A � ∠D ∠B � ∠EProve: ∠C � ∠F
Proof:
Solve for angles 1 and 2 in the figure below.
Triangle Angle-Sum Theorempp. 244–245
Exterior Angle Theorempp. 246–247
Angle-Sum Theorem
∠A � ∠D ∠B � ∠E
m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = 180 m∠D + m∠E + m∠F = 180
m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = m∠D + m∠E + m∠F
m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = m∠A + m∠B + m∠F
m∠C = m∠F
∠C = ∠F
GivenGiven
Angle-Sum Theorem
Substitution
Substitution
Subtraction
Def. of congruent angles
m∠1 = 115
m∠2 = 65
45°
70°
2 1
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 60057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 60 6/7/08 2:59:56 PM6/7/08 2:59:56 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-3
NAME DATE PERIOD
Congruent Triangles4-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 61 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the lesson. Write two things you already know about congruent triangles.
Sample answer: The corresponding parts of1. ____________________________________________________
congruent triangles are congruent. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: If the corresponding parts of two2. ____________________________________________________
triangles are congruent, then the triangles are ____________________________________________________
congruent. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term. (Lesson 4-1)
a triangle with 3 congruent acute angles————————————————————————————
a triangle with at least 2 congruent sides ————————————————————————————
a triangle with no congruent sides————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
If two geometric figures have exactly the same shape and
size, they are ______________.
In two , all of the parts of one
polygon are congruent to the or
matching parts of the other polygon.
equiangular triangle
isosceles triangle
scalene triangle
congruent
congruent polygons
corresponding parts
Active Vocabulary
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 61057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 61 6/7/08 3:00:01 PM6/7/08 3:00:01 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 62 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
If �ABC � �DEF, complete the diagram to solve for x.
Name each property of triangle congruence.
If �ABC � �DEF, then �DEF � �ABC.
�RST � �RST
If �ABC � �DEF and �DEF � �LMN, then �ABC � �LMN.
Congruent and Corresponding Partspp. 253–254
Prove Triangles Congruentpp. 255–256
40
3221 9x - 4
Write a congruence relationship that will
help solve the problem. Solve the equation for x.
x = 4
Use the congruencerelationship to
to write an equation.
9x - 4 = 32DF � AC��
Check
Transitive Property
Symmetric Property
Reflexive Property
Helping You Remember Suppose a classmate is having trouble writing congruence statements for triangles because he thinks he has to match up three pairs of sides and three pairs of angles. How can you help him understand how to write correct congruence statements more easily?
Sample answer: Name one of the triangles using its three vertices. Name—————————————————————————————————————————
the other by listing corresponding vertices in the same order as the first.—————————————————————————————————————————
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 62057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 62 6/7/08 3:00:03 PM6/7/08 3:00:03 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-4
NAME DATE PERIOD
Proving Triangles Congruent – SSS, SAS4-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 63 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 4-4. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: SSS1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: SAS2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Use the diagram to write an example for each of the following. (Lesson 4-2)
Sample answer: ⎯⎯
� YZ
————————————————————————————
Sample answer: ∠W and ∠X————————————————————————————
Sample answer: ∠XYZ————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term.
the angle formed by two adjacent sides of a polygon————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
auxiliary line
two remote interior angles to angle XYZ
exterior angle
included angle
Active Vocabulary
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 63057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 63 6/7/08 3:00:08 PM6/7/08 3:00:08 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 64 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the coordinate grid below to graph two triangles that are congruent. Explain how you could show they are congruent using the SSS postulate. Then show they are equivalent.
Sample answer: Use the vertices of the triangles and————————————————————————————
the distance formula to find the length of each side.————————————————————————————
If the corresponding sides have the same lengths, the————————————————————————————
triangles are congruent by the SSS postulate.————————————————————————————
Use the SAS Postulate to write a triangle congruence statement for the figure below.
_____________________
SSS Postulatepp. 262–264
SAS Postulatepp. 264–266
2
4
6
8
2-2
-2
-4
-6
-8
-4-6-8 4 6 8
�DEF
D( , )
E( , )
F( , )
�QRS � �TUS
�ABC
A( , )
B( , )
C( , )
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 64057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 64 6/7/08 3:00:11 PM6/7/08 3:00:11 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-5
NAME DATE PERIOD
Proving Triangles Congruent – ASA, AAS4-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 65 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 4-5. Predict two things you think you will learn about proving triangles congruent.
Sample answer: how to prove triangles congruent 1. ____________________________________________________
using the ASA Postulate ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to prove triangles congruent2. ____________________________________________________
using the AAS Theorem ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the name of the postulate that could be used to prove �EFG � �EHG. (Lesson 4-4)
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to the definition.
the side located between two consecutive angles of a polygon
________________________
________________________
________________________
6 cm6 cm
10 cm 10 cm
SAS Postulate
SSS Postulate
included side
Active Vocabulary
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 65057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 65 6/7/08 3:00:14 PM6/7/08 3:00:14 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 66 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Fill in each blank with the appropriate terms in the following statements.
In order to apply the ASA Postulate to prove two triangles are congruent, two pairs of and the of one triangle must be
to the corresponding parts of a second triangle.
In the figure above, because ∠ � ∠ , ∠ � ∠ , and � , you know that � � � .
Use the AAS Theorem to write a triangle congruence statement for the figure below.
_________________
ASA Postulatepp. 273–274
AAS Theorempp. 274–276
70° 50°
70°50°
corresponding angles
included side
congruent
A B
N C AN BC
UNA KCB
75°
75°71°
71°
�PRS � �SYP
Helping You Remember Summarize what is needed to prove triangle congruence using the four methods learned so far.
SSSThree pairs of corresponding sides are congruent.
SASTwo pairs of corresponding sides and their included angles are congruent.
ASATwo pairs of corresponding angles and their included sides are congruent.
AASTwo pairs of corresponding angles and their corresponding non-included sides are congruent.
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 66057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 66 6/7/08 3:00:18 PM6/7/08 3:00:18 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-6
NAME DATE PERIOD
Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles4-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 67 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 4-6. Write two facts you learned about isosceles and equilateral triangles as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: If two sides of a triangle are 1. ____________________________________________________
congruent, then the angles opposite those sides ____________________________________________________
are congruent. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: An equilateral triangle is also an 2. ____________________________________________________
equiangular triangle. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lesson 4-1)
a triangle with at least two congruent sides
a triangle with three congruent sides
a triangle with one angle greater than 90˚
New Vocabulary Label the diagram with the correct terms.
base angle
vertex angle
Active Vocabulary
vertex angle
base angle
isosceles triangle
equilateral triangle
obtuse triangle
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 67057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 67 6/7/08 3:00:21 PM6/7/08 3:00:21 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 68 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Describe the Isosceles Triangle Theorem and its converse in the boxes below. Then write a conditional statement using the figures to illustrate each theorem.
Solve for x in equilateral triangle QRS.
__________________
Properties of Isosceles Trianglespp. 283–284
Properties of Equilateral Trianglespp. 284–286
Isosceles Triangle Theorem
If two sides of a triangle are congruent, then the angles opposite those sides are congruent.
Example: If −−
LM � −−
LN , then ∠1 � ∠2.
Converse of Isosceles Triangle Theorem
If two angles of a triangle are congruent, then the sides opposite those angles are congruent.
Example: If ∠1 � ∠2, then −−
RS � −−
RT .
2
1
(6x - 2)°
x = 10 1 − 3
Helping You Remember If a theorem and its converse are both true, you can often remember them most easily by combining them into an “if-and-only-if” statement. Write such a statement for the Isosceles Triangle Theorem and its converse.
Sample answer: A triangle is isosceles if and only if two angles of the triangle —————————————————————————————————————————
are congruent.—————————————————————————————————————————
21
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 68057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 68 6/7/08 3:00:24 PM6/7/08 3:00:24 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-7
NAME DATE PERIOD
Classifying Triangles4-7
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 69 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 4-7. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to identify real-world1. ____________________________________________________
transformations ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to verify congruence of two2. ____________________________________________________
fi gures after a transformation ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two.
a transformation in which the position of the image may differ from that of the preimage, but the two figures remain congruent
a type of transformation that is a flip over a line
also known as a rigid transformation
the end result of a geometric transformation
an operation that maps an original geometric figure onto a new figure
a type of transformation that is a turn around a fixed point
a type of transformation that is a slide of a figure
the original figure in a geometric transformation
congruence transformation
image
isometry
preimage
reflection
rotation
transformation
translation
Active Vocabulary
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 69057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 69 6/7/08 8:33:11 PM6/7/08 8:33:11 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-7 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 70 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Write the type of transformation of triangle ABC (the preimage) in each box.
Complete each statement to verify the congruence.
Identify Congruence Transformationpp. 294–295
Verify Congruencep. 296
translation
reflectionrotation
y
x
′
′ ′
′ ′
′ ′
′ ′
y
x
2
4
6
-6
-4
-2
-2-4-6
RS =
ST =
RT =
R'S' =
S'T' =
R'T' =
Helping You Remember Geometric reflections, translations, and rotations are also known as flips, slides, and turns. Describe how these terms appropriately illustrate the corresponding transformations.
Sample answer: In a reflection, points are flipped across a line. In a translation, —————————————————————————————————————————
points are slid the same distance and direction. In a rotation, points are turned —————————————————————————————————————————
about a common point.—————————————————————————————————————————
3
5
4
3
5
4
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 70057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 70 6/7/08 3:00:31 PM6/7/08 3:00:31 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
4-8
NAME DATE PERIOD
Triangles and Coordinate Proof4-8
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 71 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to position and label1. ____________________________________________________
triangles for use in coordinate proofs ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to write coordinate proofs2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lesson 4-7)
an operation that maps an original geometric figure onto a new figure
a type of transformation that is a slide of a figure
also known as a rigid transformation
a type of transformation that is a flip over a line
the end result of a geometric transformation
a type of transformation that is a turn around a fixed point
the original figure in a geometric transformation
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term.
a method of using figures in the coordinate plane ————————————————————————————
and algebra to prove geometric concepts————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
coordinate proof
transformation
translation
isometry
reflection
image
rotation
preimage
Active Vocabulary
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 71057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 71 6/7/08 3:00:35 PM6/7/08 3:00:35 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 4-8 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 72 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the boxes below to illustrate the four key steps in placing a triangle on a coordinate grid to aid in coordinate proof.
Complete each statement showing the side lengths of triangle RST. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary. Classify the triangle.
Position and Label Trianglespp. 301–302
Write Coordinate Proofspp. 302–303
y
xStep 1 Usethe origin as avertex.
Step 3Keep the triangle in the first quadrant
2
2 4 6
4
6
Step 4 Usecoordinatesthat makecomputationssimple.
Step 2 Place at least one side on an axis.
y
x
23
5
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4
67 RS �
RT �
TS �
Triangle RST is .
6.71
6.32
5
scalene
Helping You Remember Many students find it easier to remember mathematical formulas if they can put them into words in a compact way. Describe how you can use coordinate proof to help you remember the midpoint formula.
Sample answer: When you plot two points on the coordinate grid, the midpoint —————————————————————————————————————————
is halfway between the x- and y-coordinates of the endpoints. Add the —————————————————————————————————————————
x-coordinates and add the y-coordinates. Divide each by 2.—————————————————————————————————————————
057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 72057-072_GEOSNC04_890858.indd 72 6/7/08 3:00:37 PM6/7/08 3:00:37 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 73 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a term or formula from the chapter.
Congruent Triangles
Transformations Types Angles
Triangles
Congruence
Obtuse
RightAcute
Equiangular
IsoscelesEquilateral
Scalene
Translations
Classified by Angles
Classified by Sides
Interior
Reflexive
Symmetric
TransitiveAAS
ASA
SAS
SSSProperties Theorems
Exterior = Sum
of remote
interiors
Sum of 360°
Sum of 180°
Exterior
Rotations
Reflections
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec3:73001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec3:73 6/14/08 12:43:51 AM6/14/08 12:43:51 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 4 74 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 4.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 4 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 4 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Be an active listener in class. Take notes, circle or highlight information that your
teacher stresses, and ask questions when ideas are unclear to you.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
Congruent Triangles
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec3:74001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec3:74 6/14/08 12:43:55 AM6/14/08 12:43:55 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 75 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, respond to these statements.1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, include personal experiences that relate to the lesson
and ways in which what you have learned will be used in your daily life.
• When you take notes, write questions you have about the lessons in the margin of your notes.
Then include the answers to these questions as you work through the lesson.
Relationships in Triangles
Before You Read Relationships in Triangles
See students’ work.
• Concurrent lines do not intersect and stay the same distance apart.
• To find the incenter of a triangle, draw a circle within the triangle.
• Every triangle has 3 medians that are concurrent.
• The largest angle in a triangle is opposite the longest side.
• The Hinge Theorem is a way of proving triangle relationships.
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec4:75001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec4:75 6/14/08 12:46:57 AM6/14/08 12:46:57 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 76 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on medians and altitudes of triangles, one fact might be lines containing the altitudes of a triangle are concurrent, intersecting at a point called the orthocenter. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Relationships in Triangles
Lesson Fact
5-1 Bisectors of Triangles See students’ work.
5-2 Medians and Altitudes of Triangles
5-3 Inequalities of One Triangle
5-4 Indirect Proof
5-5 The Triangle Inequality
5-6 Inequalities in Two Triangles
5-7 Congruence Transformations
5-8 Triangles and Coordinate Proof
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec4:76001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec4:76 6/14/08 12:47:02 AM6/14/08 12:47:02 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Bisectors of Triangles5-1
Less
on
5-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 77 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 5-1. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and figures in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to use the Perpendicular 1. ____________________________________________________
Bisector Theorems ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the Circumcenter 2. ____________________________________________________
Theorem ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
the place where three or more intersecting lines meet
a segment, line, or plane that intersects a segment at its midpoint and is perpendicular to the segment
the point of intersection of the perpendicular bisectors of the three sides of a triangle
three or more lines that intersect at a common point
the point of intersection of the angle bisectors of the three angles of a triangle
Vocabulary Link Look up the definition of bisect. Use it to write the meaning of an angle bisector.
Sample answer: Bisect means to cut or divide into ___________________________________________________
two equal parts. So, an angle bisector divides an ___________________________________________________
angle into two equal angles.___________________________________________________
point of concurrency
perpendicular bisector
concurrent lines
circumcenter
incenter
Active Vocabulary
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 77077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 77 6/7/08 2:22:40 PM6/7/08 2:22:40 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 5-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 78 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Describe the Perpendicular Bisector Theorem in the box below. Then write a conditional statement using the figures to illustrate the theorem.
Solve for x in the figure below.
Perpendicular Bisector Theorem
If a point is on the perpendicular bisector of a segment, then it is equidistant from the endpoints of the segment.
Perpendicular Bisectorspp. 322–324
Angle Bisectorspp. 324–326
1 2
Example: If −−
LO is a perpendicular bisector of −−
MN ,
then −−−
MO = −−
ON .
x =
Helping You Remember A good way to remember theorems and postulates in geometry is to explain them to other classmates in your own words. How would you describe the Angle Bisector Theorem to a classmate who is having difficulty understanding the theorem
Sample answer: Any point on the bisector of an angle is the same distance —————————————————————————————————————————
from both sides of the angle.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
5x + 2
8x - 7
90°
90°
3
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 78077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 78 6/7/08 2:22:44 PM6/7/08 2:22:44 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Medians and Altitudes of Triangles5-2
Less
on
5-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 79 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 5-2. Predict two things you think you will learn about medians and altitudes of triangles.
Sample answer: how to use the Centroid Theorem1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the orthocenter on 2. ____________________________________________________
a coordinate plane ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Label the diagram with the correct term. (Lesson 5-1)
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
a segment with endpoints being a vertex of a triangle ___________________________________________________
and the midpoint of the opposite side___________________________________________________
the point of concurrency of the medians of a triangle___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
a segment of a triangle from a vertex that is ___________________________________________________
perpendicular to the line containing the opposite ___________________________________________________
of the triangle___________________________________________________
the point of concurrency of the lines containing the ___________________________________________________
altitudes of a triangle___________________________________________________
median
centroid
altitude
orthocenter
Active Vocabulary
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 79077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 79 6/7/08 2:22:50 PM6/7/08 2:22:50 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 5-2 (continued)
PDF 2nd
Chapter 5 80 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Point O is the centroid of triangle VTR. Use the Centroid Theorem to complete each statement.
TO = TW WR =
VS = VO 2 RS =
Name the orthocenter of �RST.
Medianspp. 333–335
Altitudespp. 335–337
2 − 3
3 −
2
VW
RT
y
x ( , )-1 4
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to explain it to someone else. Suppose that a classmate is having trouble remembering whether the center of gravity of a triangle is the orthocenter, the centroid, the incenter, or the circumcenter of the triangle. Suggest a way to remember which point it is.
Sample answer: Associate the term centroid with center of gravity. —————————————————————————————————————————
The centroid is the point of balance for any triangle.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 80077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 80 6/10/08 10:05:06 PM6/10/08 10:05:06 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Inequalities in One Triangle5-3
Less
on
5-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 81 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to recognize and apply 1. ____________________________________________________
properties of inequalities to the measures of the ____________________________________________________
angles of a triangle ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to recognize and apply 2. ____________________________________________________
properties of inequalities to the relationships ____________________________________________________
between the angles and sides of a triangle ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two. (Lessons 5-1 and 5-2)
the place where three or more intersecting lines meet
the point of concurrency of the medians of a triangle
a segment of a triangle from a vertex that is perpendicular to the line containing the opposite of the triangle
the point of concurrency of the lines containing the altitudes of a triangle
a segment with endpoints being a vertex of a triangle and the midpoint of the opposite side
a segment, line, or plane that intersect a segment at its midpoint and is perpendicular to the segment
three or more lines that intersect at a common point
the point of intersection of the perpendicular bisectors of the three sides of a triangle
the point of intersection of the angle bisectors of the three angles of a triangle
perpendicular bisector
orthocenter
altitude
incenter
point of concurrency
median
circumcenter
concurrent lines
centroid
Active Vocabulary
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 81077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 81 6/7/08 2:22:58 PM6/7/08 2:22:58 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 5-3 (continued)
PDF 2nd
Chapter 5 82 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Describe the Exterior Angle Inequality Theorem in your own words. Then use the figure below to write two inequalities.
Sample answer: The measure of an exterior angle of ___________________________________________________
a triangle is greater than the measure of either remote ___________________________________________________
interior angle; m∠1 < m∠A, m∠1 < m∠B___________________________________________________
List the angles of �LMN in order from least to greatest.
Angle Inequalitiespp. 342–343
Angle-Side Inequalitiespp. 343–345
1
Helping You Remember Explain how the Exterior Angle Inequality Theorem is related to the Exterior Angle Theorem, and why the Exterior Angle Inequality Theorem must be true if the Exterior Angle Theorem is true.
Sample answer: The Ext. Angle Theorem says that the measure of an exterior —————————————————————————————————————————
angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the measures of the two remote —————————————————————————————————————————
interior angles, while the Ext. Angle Inequality Theorem says that the measure —————————————————————————————————————————
of an exterior angle is greater than the measure of either remote interior angle.—————————————————————————————————————————
If a number is equal to the sum of two positive numbers, it must be greater —————————————————————————————————————————
than each of those two numbers.—————————————————————————————————————————
10.2
7.511.6
∠L, ∠N, ∠M
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 82077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 82 6/10/08 10:06:39 PM6/10/08 10:06:39 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Indirect Proof5-4
Less
on
5-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 83 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 5-4. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Indirect Algebraic Proof1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Indirect Proof with Geometry2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
Indirect reasoning is a method of thinking that assumes that a conclusion is and then showing that this assumption leads to a contradiction.
In an indirect proof, you temporarily assume that what you are trying to prove is false. By showing this assumption to be logically impossible, you prove your assumption false and the true.
To construct a proof by contradiction, the first step is to that the conclusion you want to
prove is false.
Vocabulary Link Think of other times you have encountered the word indirect in mathematics. Describe any similarities to an indirect proof.
Sample answer: indirect measurement; You don’t ___________________________________________________
directly measure a quantity just as you don’t directly ___________________________________________________
prove a conclusion.___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
indirect reasoning
indirect proof
proof by contradiction
Active Vocabulary
original conclusion
false
assume
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 83077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 83 6/7/08 2:23:04 PM6/7/08 2:23:04 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 5-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 84 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the table below showing the steps involved in constructing an indirect proof.
How to Write an Indirect ProofStep 1 Sample answer: Identify the conclusion you
are asked to prove. Make the assumption that this conclusion is false by assuming that the opposite is true.
Step 2 Sample answer: Use logical reasoning to show that this assumption leads to a contradiction of the hypothesis, or some other fact, such as a definition, postulate, theorem, or corollary.
Step 3 Sample answer: Point out that because the assumption leads to a contradiction, the original conclusion, what you were asked to prove, must be true.
Suppose you want to prove that the sum of interior angles of a triangle is equal to 180º. What assumption would you make to form an indirect proof of this statement?
Indirect Algebraic Proofpp. 351–353
Indirect Proof with Geometrypp. 353–354
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new concept in mathematics is to relate it to something you have already learned. How is the process of indirect proof related to the relationship between a conditional statement and its contrapositive?
Sample answer: The contrapositive of a statement p → q is the statement —————————————————————————————————————
~q → ~p. In an indirect proof of a conditional statement p → q, you assume —————————————————————————————————————
that q is false and show that this implies that p is false. That is, you show that —————————————————————————————————————
~q → ~p is true, which is logically equivalent to p → q.—————————————————————————————————————
1 2
3
Assume: m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 ≠ 180
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 84077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 84 6/7/08 2:23:07 PM6/7/08 2:23:07 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
The Triangle Inequality5-5
Less
on
5-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 85 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 5-5. Write two facts you learned about the triangle inequality.
Sample answer: You can use the triangle 1. ____________________________________________________
inequality to identify possible triangles given their ____________________________________________________
side lengths. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: The sum of two sides of a triangle 2. ____________________________________________________
must be greater than the length of the third side. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Label each figure with the correct term. (Lessons 5-1 and 5-2)
Active Vocabulary
3
3
55
4
4
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 85077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 85 6/7/08 2:23:10 PM6/7/08 2:23:10 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 5-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 86 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
If the measures of two sides of a triangle are 4 centimeters and 9 centimeters, what is the least possible whole number measure for the third side?
Complete the two-column proof.Given:
−− FI �
−− FJ
Prove: FI + FH > HJ
The Triangle Inequalitypp. 360–361
Proofs Using the Triangle Inequalityp. 362
Step 1: Use the triangle inequality to write three inequalities for a triangle with sides 4, 9, and x centimeters.
4 + 9 > x 4 + x > 9 9 + x > 4
Step 2: Solve each the inequalities.
4 + 9 > x
x < 13
4 + x > 9
x > 5
9 + x > 4x > - 5
Step 3: Use the inequalities to solve the problem.
x = 6 centimeters
Statements Reasons1.
−−
FI � −−
FJ 1. Given
2. FI = FJ 2. Def of cong. seg.
3. FJ + FH > HJ 3. Triangle Ineq.
4. FI + FH > HJ 4. Substitution
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new theorem is to state it informally in different words. How could you restate the Triangle Inequality Theorem?
Sample answer: The sides that connect one vertex of a triangle to another is —————————————————————————————————————————
a shorter path between the two vertices than the path that goes through the —————————————————————————————————————————
third vertex.—————————————————————————————————————————
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 86077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 86 6/7/08 2:23:15 PM6/7/08 2:23:15 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Inequalities in Two Triangles5-6
Less
on
5-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 87 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about inequalities in two triangles.
Sample answer: The Hinge Theorem is also called 1. ____________________________________________________
the SAS Inequality Theorem. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: You can prove triangle 2. ____________________________________________________
relationships using the Hinge Theorem. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lessons 5-1 and 5-2)
a segment of a triangle from a vertex that is perpendicular to the line containing the opposite of the triangle
a segment, line, or plane that intersect a segment at its midpoint and is perpendicular to the segment
the point of intersection of the perpendicular bisectors of the three sides of a triangle
the point of concurrency of the medians of a triangle
Vocabulary Link Describe how the hinge of a door can be used to illustrate the Hinge Theorem.
Sample answer: The width of the door frame and the ___________________________________________________
door itself form the two sides. If you open two of the ___________________________________________________
same size doors at different angles, the door that is ___________________________________________________
open to a greater angle is farther from the door frame.___________________________________________________
altitude
perpendicular bisector
circumcenter
centroid
Active Vocabulary
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 87077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 87 6/7/08 2:23:20 PM6/7/08 2:23:20 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 5-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 88 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Find the range of possible values for x in the figure below.
Describe how you could use the Hinge Theorem to complete the proof below.Given: AC = CDProve: BD > AB
Hinge Theorempp. 367–370
Prove Relationships in Two Trianglespp. 370–371
(3x - 5)°61°
10 10
1412
Write an inequality using the Converse of the Hinge Theorem.
Write an inequality given the angle is less
than 180º.61 < 3x - 5 3x - 5 < 180
Solve for x. Solve for x.x > 22 x > 61 2 −
3
What are the possible values of x ?
22 < x < 61 2 − 3
Sample answer: You know that 2 sides of �BDC are congruent to 2 sides of �ABC. Since the included angle of �BDC is greater, the Hinge Theorem says that the third side is greater than the third side of �ABC. So, BD > AB. The distance between the points increases or decreases accordingly.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to think of it in concrete terms. How can you illustrate the Hinge Theorem with everyday objects?
Sample answer: Put two pencils on a desktop so that the erasers touch. —————————————————————————————————————————
As you increase or decrease the measure of the angle formed by the pencils, —————————————————————————————————————————
the distance between the points increases of decreases accordingly.—————————————————————————————————————————
077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 88077-088_GEOSNC05_890858.indd 88 6/7/08 2:23:22 PM6/7/08 2:23:22 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 89 Glencoe Geometry
Complete each graphic organizer with a term, description, diagram, or theorem from the chapter.
Relationships in Triangles
Triangle Inequalities
Exterior Angles The measure of an exterior angle is greater than the measure of either remote interior angle.
Angle-Side The largest angle is across from the longest side. The smallest angle is across from the shortest side.
Triangle Inequality
The longest side is across from the largest angle. The shortest side is across from the smallest angle.
Hinge If two pairs of sides in two triangles are congruent, and the included angle of one is larger than the included angle of the other, then the third side of the first triangle is longer than the third side of the second triangle.
Segment DefinitionPoint
of Concurrency
Property of
PointDiagram
perpendicularbisector
a segment that bisects the side of a triangle at a right angle
circumcenter center of the circumscribed circle
angle bisector a segment that bisects the angles of a triangle
incenter center of an inscribed circle
median a segment that connects a vertex of a triangle with the midpoint of the opposite side
centroid center of gravity of the triangle
altitude a segment from the vertex of a triangle that intersects the opposite side at a right angle
orthocenter the point of concurrency of the altitudes of a triangle
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec4:89001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec4:89 6/14/08 12:44:00 AM6/14/08 12:44:00 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 5 90 Glencoe Geometry
Now that you have read and worked through the chapter, think about what you have learned and complete the table below. Compare your previous answers with these.
1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 5.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 5 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 5 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Get a good nights rest before a test. Students that take the time to sleep usually do
better than students who stay up late cramming.
Relationships in Triangles After You Read
• Concurrent lines do not intersect and stay the same distance apart.
D
• To find the incenter of a triangle, draw a circle within the triangle.
A
• Every triangle has 3 medians that are concurrent. A
• The largest angle in a triangle is opposite the shortest side.
D
• The Hinge Theorem is a way of proving triangle relationships.
A
Relationships in Triangles
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec4:90001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec4:90 6/14/08 12:44:08 AM6/14/08 12:44:08 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 91 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, respond to these statements.1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, look for written real-world examples in your everyday
life. Comment on how writers use statistics to prove or disprove points of view and discuss
the ethical responsibilities writers have when using statistics.
• When you take notes, include visuals. Clearly label the visuals and write captions when needed.
Quadrilaterals
Before You Read Quadrilaterals
See students’ work.
• The sum of the interior angles of a convex polygon is (n – 1) × 180.
• A diagonal cuts a parallelogram into 2 congruent triangles.
• A rhombus is a quadrilateral.
• If a parallelogram has 1 right angle, then it has 4 right angles.
• A trapezoid can have 0 or 1 set of parallel sides.
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec5:91001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec5:91 6/14/08 1:38:37 AM6/14/08 1:38:37 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 92 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on rectangles, one fact might be a parallelogram with four right angles is a rectangle. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Quadrilaterals
Lesson Fact
6-1 Angles of Polygons See students’ work.
6-2 Parallelograms
6-3 Tests for Parallelograms
6-4 Rectangles
6-5 Rhombi and Squares
6-6 Trapezoids and Kites
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec5:92001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec5:92 6/14/08 12:47:13 AM6/14/08 12:47:13 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
6-1
NAME DATE PERIOD
Angles of Polygons6-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 93 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 6-1. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and figures in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to find the sum of the1. ____________________________________________________
interior angles of a polygon ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the number of sides2. ____________________________________________________
of a polygon given its interior angle measures ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term.
a segment in a polygon that connects any two————————————————————————————
nonconsecutive vertices————————————————————————————
Name all of the diagonals in polygon ABCDE.
−− AC ,
−− AD ,
−− BD ,
−− BE ,
−− CE
Vocabulary Link Look up how television screens are measured. What does it mean for a television to have a 32-inch screen?
Sample answer: The screens are measured along the————————————————————————————
diagonal; 32-inch diagonal.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
diagonal
Active Vocabulary
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 93093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 93 6/7/08 3:09:23 PM6/7/08 3:09:23 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 6-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 94 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the following table for convex polygons. For middle column, find the number of triangles you can divide the polygon into by drawing all the possible diagonals from one vertex.
polygonnumberof sides
number of triangles
sum of interior angle measures
triangle 3 1 180°
hexagon 6 4 720°
octagon 8 6 1080°
nonagon 9 7 1260°
n-gon n n - 2 (n - 2)180°
Find the value of x in the figure below.
x = 15x = 15
Polygon Interior Angles Sumpp. 389–392
Polygon Exterior Angles Sumpp. 392–393
(8x + 5)°(6x)°
80°
65°
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical idea or formula is to relate it to something you already know. How can you use your knowledge of the Angle Sum Theorem (for a triangle) to help you remember the Interior Angle Sum Theorem?
Sample answer: The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a triangle—————————————————————————————————————————
is 180°. Each time another side is added, the polygon can be subdivided into —————————————————————————————————————————
one more triangle, so 180° is added to the interior angle sum.—————————————————————————————————————————
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 94093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 94 6/7/08 3:09:28 PM6/7/08 3:09:28 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
6-2
NAME DATE PERIOD
Parallelograms6-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 95 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: about the properties of1. ____________________________________________________
parallelograms ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: about the properties of the2. ____________________________________________________
diagonals of parallelograms ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition of the term.
a quadrilateral with both pairs of opposite sides————————————————————————————
parallel————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Fill in each blank using parallelogram ABCD.
−−
AB ||
−−− BE �
−−− AD �
−−− BC ||
−− AE �
parallelogram
−−
CD
−−
DE
−−
BC
−−
AD
−−
EC
Active Vocabulary
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 95093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 95 6/7/08 3:09:32 PM6/7/08 3:09:32 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 6-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 96 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the table using Theorems 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, and 6.6 in the Student Edition.
Properties of ParallelogramsTheorem Property
6.3 If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its
opposite sides are .
6.4 If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its
opposite angles are .
6.5 If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its
opposite sides are .
6.6 If a parallelogram has one right angle, then it
has four .
Find the value of z in the parallelogram below.
Sides and Angles of Parallelogramspp. 399–400
Diagonals of Parallelogramspp. 401–402
congruent
congruent
supplementary
right angles
9z - 4
4z + 21
z = 5
Helping You Remember A good way to remember new theorems in geometry is to relate them to theorems you learned earlier. Name a theorem about parallel lines that can be used to remember the theorem that says, “If a parallelogram has one right angle, it has four right angles.”
Perpendicular Transversal Theorem—————————————————————————————————————————
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 96093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 96 6/7/08 3:09:36 PM6/7/08 3:09:36 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
6-3
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tests for Parallelograms6-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 97 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 6-3. Predict two things you think you will learn about tests for parallelograms.
Sample answer: how to recognize the conditions 1. ____________________________________________________
that ensure a quadrilateral is a parallelogram ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to prove that a set of points2. ____________________________________________________
forms a parallelogram in the coordinate plane ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 6-1 and 6-2)
A diagonal is a segment in a polygon that connects any two
vertices.
A parallelogram is a quadrilateral with both pairs of
parallel.
Fill in each blank to review the properties of parallelograms.
The sides of a parallelogram are congruent.
The opposite angles of a parallelogram are .
Consecutive angles in a parallelogram are .
If a parallelogram has one angle, then it
has four angles.
diagonal
parallelogram
Active Vocabulary
nonconsecutive
opposite sides
opposite
congruent
supplementary
right
right
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 97093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 97 6/7/08 3:09:40 PM6/7/08 3:09:40 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 6-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 98 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the table using Theorems 6.9, 6.10, 6.11, and 6.12 in the student book for any quadrilateral ABCD.
Properties of Parallelograms
Theorem Property
6.9If both pairs of opposite sides of ABCD are
, then ABCD is a parallelogram.
6.10If both pairs of opposite angles of ABCD are
, then ABCD is a parallelogram.
6.11If the diagonals of ABCD
each other, then ABCD is a parallelogram.
6.12If one pair of opposite sides of ABCD is both
, then ABCD is a parallelogram.
Find the slope of each line segment to verify that WXYZ is a parallelogram.
Conditions for Parallelogramspp. 409–411
Parallelograms on the Coordinate Planepp. 412–413
congruent
congruent
parallel and congruent
bisect
y
x
slope of −−−
WX = _________ 1 − 8
slope of −−
XY = _________5
slope of −−
YZ = _________ 1 − 8
slope of −−−
WZ = _________5
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a large number of mathematical ideas is to think of them in groups. How can you state the conditions as one group about the sides of a quadrilateral that guarantee it is a parallelogram?
Sample answer: both pairs of opposite sides parallel, both pairs of opposite —————————————————————————————————————————
sides congruent, or one pair of opposite sides both parallel and congruent—————————————————————————————————————————
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 98093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 98 6/7/08 3:09:43 PM6/7/08 3:09:43 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
6-4
NAME DATE PERIOD
Rectangles6-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 99 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 6-4. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Properties of Rectangles1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Prove that Parallelograms are2. ____________________________________________________
Rectangles ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition of the term.
a parallelogram with four right angles————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Fill in each blank using rectangle ABCD.
−− AB �� __________
−− AC � __________
m∠ADC = __________
m∠BCD = __________
−−−
AD � __________
rectangle
−−
CD
−−
BD
90
90
−−
BC
Active Vocabulary
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 99093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 99 6/7/08 3:09:48 PM6/7/08 3:09:48 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 6-4 (continued)
PDF 2nd
Chapter 6 100 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Cross out the incorrect quadrilateral to complete the Venn diagram and illustrate the relationship between rectangles and parallelograms. Then write the definition of the correct quadrilateral in the space provided.
Use the Distance Formula to determine whether or not parallelogram RSTU is a rectangle.
1010
Properties of Rectanglespp. 419–420
Prove That Parallelograms Are Rectanglespp. 420–421
rectangleparallelogram
rectangleparallelogram
y
xSU ≈ _________
RT ≈ _________10.2
RSTU is not a rectangle.
Helping You Remember It is easier to remember a large number of geometric relationships and theorems if you are able to combine some of them. How can you combine the two theorems about diagonals that you studied in this lesson?
Sample answer: A parallelogram is a rectangle if and only if its diagonals are—————————————————————————————————————————
congruent.—————————————————————————————————————————
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 100093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 100 6/10/08 10:18:30 PM6/10/08 10:18:30 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
6-5
NAME DATE PERIOD
Rhombi and Squares6-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 101 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 6-5. Write two facts you learned about rhombi and squares.
Sample answer: The diagonals of a rhombus are1. ____________________________________________________
perpendicular. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: If a quadrilateral is both a2. ____________________________________________________
rectangle and a rhombus, then it is a square. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Label the diagrams with the correct terms.
Vocabulary Link A square is a shape that you learn at a very early age. Name some everyday items that are shaped like a square. Can you name any items that are shaped like a rhombus?
Sample answer for square: tile on a floor————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Sample answer for rhombus: the diamonds in a————————————————————————————
deck of cards————————————————————————————
rhombus
square
rhombus and
square
rhombus
Active Vocabulary
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 101093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 101 6/7/08 3:09:56 PM6/7/08 3:09:56 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 6-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 102 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the properties of rhombi to solve for x in rhombus ABCD.
Describe how you could prove that RS2 = RV2 + SV2 in rhombus RSTU.
Properties of Rhombi and Squarespp. 426–428
Prove That Quadrilaterals Are Rhombi or Squarespp. 428–430
AD = 8x - 11
DC = 5x + 13
Check
What property of rhombi can you use tohelp you solve for x?
Use the property to write an equation.
– = +
Solve for x.
=
Sample answer: ∠RVS is a
right angle because the
Use the Pythagoren Theorem.
diagonals are perpendicular.
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 102093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 102 6/7/08 3:10:00 PM6/7/08 3:10:00 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
6-6
NAME DATE PERIOD
Trapezoids and Kites6-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 103 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about trapezoids and kites.
Sample answer: If a quadrilateral has only one set 1. ____________________________________________________
of parallel sides, then it is a trapezoid. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: The diagonals of a kite are2. ____________________________________________________
perpendicular to each other. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two.
the segment that connects the midpoints of the legs of the trapezoid
a quadrilateral with exactly two pairs of consecutive congruent sides
the nonparallel sides of a trapezoid
the parallel sides of a trapezoid
the angles formed by the base and one of the legs of a trapezoid
a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides
a trapezoid with congruent legs
base angles
bases
isosceles trapezoid
kite
legs of a trapezoid
midsegment of a trapezoid
trapezoid
Active Vocabulary
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 103093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 103 6/7/08 3:10:06 PM6/7/08 3:10:06 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 6-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 104 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the flow proof below.Given: ABCD is an isosceles trapezoid
with bases −−
AB and −−−
CD .Prove: ∠BDC � ACD
Solve for x if −−−
MN is a midsegment of trapezoid RSTU.
Properties of Trapezoidspp. 435–438
Properties of Kitespp. 438–439
ABCD is an isosceles trapezoid with bases −−
AB and −−
CD .
Given
−−
AB � −−
AB −−
AC � −−
BD −−
AD � −−
BC
Reflexive Prop. Diagonals are cong. Def. isoc. trap.
�BDC � �ACD ∠BDC � ∠ACD
SSS CPCTC
x
16.5
14.4
18.6x =
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new geometric theorem is to relate it to one you already know. Name and state in words a theorem about triangles that is similar to the theorem in this lesson about the median of a trapezoid.
Sample answer: Triangle Midsegment Theorem; A midsegment of a triangle is—————————————————————————————————————————
parallel to one side of the triangle, and its length is one half the length of that—————————————————————————————————————————
side.—————————————————————————————————————————
093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 104093-104_GEOSNC06_890858.indd 104 6/7/08 3:10:09 PM6/7/08 3:10:09 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 105 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with properties of the figure from the chapter.
Quadrilaterals
Quadrilaterals
Kites
Two pairs of consecutive sides are congruent.Diagonals are perpendicular.One pair of opposite angles are congruent.
IsoscelesTrapezoids
One pair of sides is congruent.Both pairs of base angles are congruent.Diagonals are congruent.
Trapezoids
One pair of sides is parallel.
Parallelograms
Opposite sides are congruent. Opposite angles are congruent. Consecutive angles are supplementary. Diagonals bisect each other. One pair of opposite sides are both congruent and parallel.
Squares
Rectangles
All angles are right angles.Diagonals are congruent.
Rhombi
All sides are congruent.Diagonals are perpendicular.
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec5:105001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec5:105 6/14/08 12:44:12 AM6/14/08 12:44:12 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 6 106 Glencoe Geometry
Now that you have read and worked through the chapter, think about what you have learned and complete the table below. Compare your previous answers with these.
1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 6.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 6 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 6 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • When you are preparing to read new material, scan the text first, briefly looking over
headings, highlighted text, pictures, and call out boxes. Think of questions that you can search the text for as you read.
Quadrilaterals
Quadrilaterals After You Read
• The sum of the interior angles of a convex polygon is (n – 1) × 180.
D
• A diagonal cuts a parallelogram into 2 congruent triangles.
A
• A rhombus is a quadrilateral. A
• If a parallelogram has 1 right angle, then it has 4 right angles.
A
• A trapezoid can have 0 or 1 set of parallel sides. D
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec5:106001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec5:106 6/14/08 1:34:38 AM6/14/08 1:34:38 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 107 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about proportions and similarity. List three things you already know about proportions and similarity in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about them in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, write instructions on how to do something presented in
each lesson. Then follow your own instructions to check them for accuracy.
• When you take notes, be sure to describe steps in detail. Include examples of questions you might ask yourself during problem solving.
Proportions and Similarity
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec6:107001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec6:107 6/14/08 12:47:17 AM6/14/08 12:47:17 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 108 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on similar polygons, one fact might be similar polygons have the same shape but not the same size. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Proportions and Similarity
Lesson Fact
7-1 Ratios and Proportions See students’ work.
7-2 Similar Polygons
7-3 Similar Triangles
7-4 Parallel Lines and Proportional Parts
7-5 Parts of Similar Triangles
7-6 Similarity Transformations
7-7 Scale Drawings and Models
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec6:108001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec6:108 6/14/08 12:47:22 AM6/14/08 12:47:22 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Ratios and Proportions7-1
Less
on
7-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 109 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 7-1. Predict two things you think you will learn about ratios and proportions.
Sample answer: how to write and use ratios1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use cross products to2. ____________________________________________________
make predictions ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two.
the numbers a and d in the proportion a − b = c −
d
an equation stating that two ratios are equal
a ratio that compares three or more numbers
the product of the extremes, ad, and the product of the means, bc in the proportion a −
b = c −
d
a comparison of two quantities using division
the numbers b and c in the proportion a − b = c −
d
Vocabulary Link Look up the meaning of the word proportional. How does this relate to a proportion in mathematics?
Sample answer: properly related in size or scale————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
cross product
extended ratio
extremes
means
proportion
ratio
Active Vocabulary
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 109109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 109 6/7/08 3:13:02 PM6/7/08 3:13:02 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 110 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
The ratio of the measures of the angles in �DEF is 4:5:9. Find the measures of the angles.
_______ : _______ : _______
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
A quality control engineer randomly samples 120 car stereos coming off an assembly line. He finds that 3 of them have cosmetic blemishes. How many car stereos would you expect to have cosmetic blemishes in a production run of 8000 car stereos?
_________________________
_________________________
Write and Use Ratiospp. 457–458
Use Properties of Proportionspp. 458–459
9x5x4xStep 1: Multiply the ratio by x to represent the unknown angle measures.
Step 2: Write an equation using the extended ratio and the Triangle Sum Theorem.
Step 3: Solve for x.
Step 4: Find the angle measures.
4x + 5x + 9x = 180
3 −
120 = x
− 8000
40°, 50°, 90°
Write a proportion.
Solve the proportion. 200 stereos
Helping You Remember Sometimes it is easier to remember a mathematical idea if you put it into words without using any mathematical symbols. How can you use this approach to remember the concept of equality of cross products?
Sample answer: The product of the means equals the product of the extremes.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
x = 10
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 110109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 110 6/7/08 3:13:05 PM6/7/08 3:13:05 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Similar Polygons7-2
Less
on
7-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 111 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 7-2. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and figures in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to identify similar figures1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use similar figures to find2. ____________________________________________________
missing measures ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term. (Lesson 7-1)
an equation stating that two ratios are equal————————————————————————————
a ratio that compares three or more numbers————————————————————————————
the numbers b and c in the proportion a −
c =
c −
d
————————————————————————————
a comparison of two quantities using division————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
the scale factor between two similar polygons
polygons that have the same shape but not necessarily the same size
the ratio of the lengths of the corresponding sides of two similar polygons
Active Vocabulary
proportion
extended ratio
extremes
ratio
similarity ratio
similar polygons
scale factor
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 111109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 111 6/7/08 3:13:08 PM6/7/08 3:13:08 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-2 (continued)
PDF 2nd
Chapter 7 112 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Model two similar triangles by writing the side lengths of �XYZ. Then tell the scale factor from �HIJ to �XYZ.
Sample answer is given.
Solve for y in the similar trapezoids below.
Identify Similar Polygonspp. 465–466
Use Similar Figurespp. 467–468
20
12
16 16
9.6
12.8
scale factor: _____________1.25
9
27
18
2y + 1
y = _____________2.5
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical vocabulary term is to relate it to words used in everyday life. The word scale has many meanings in English. Give three phrases that include the word scale in a way that is related to proportions.
Sample answer: scale drawing, scale model, scale of miles (on a map)—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 112109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 112 6/10/08 11:02:31 PM6/10/08 11:02:31 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Similar Triangles7-3
Less
on
7-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 113 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to identify similar triangles1. ____________________________________________________
using the AA Postulate, SSS Theorem, and SAS ____________________________________________________
Theorem ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use similar triangles to2. ____________________________________________________
solve problems ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 7-1, 7-2)
The extremes are the numbers ___________ and ___________
in the proportion a − b = c −
d .
The means are the numbers ___________ and ___________ in
the proportion a − b = c −
d .
A proportion is an equation stating that __________________
are equal.
The scale factor is the ratio of the lengths of the
____________________ sides of two similar polygons.
A ratio is a comparison of two quantities using ____________.
Similar polygons have the same ____________ but not
necessarily the same ____________.
a d
b c
corresponding
two ratios
division
shape
size
extremes
means
proportion
scale factor
ratio
similar polygons
Active Vocabulary
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 113109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 113 6/7/08 3:13:20 PM6/7/08 3:13:20 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 114 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Determine whether the triangles are similar. If so, write a similarity statement. Explain your reasoning.
�ORS ∼ �YVT by AA similarity. ____________________________________________________
Complete the table to show the properties of similarity in Theorem 7.5.
Identify Similar Trianglespp. 474–477
Use Similar Trianglespp. 477–478
77°
65°
77°
65°
Theorem 7.5Properties of Similarity
Reflexive Property �ABC ∼ �ABC
Symmetric Property If �ABC ∼ �DEF, then �DEF ∼ �ABC.
Transitive Property If �ABC ∼ �DEF, and �DEF ∼ �LMN, then �ABC ∼ �LMN.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to explain it to somone else. Suppose one of your classmates is having trouble understanding the difference between SAS for congruent triangles and SAS for similar triangles. How can you explain the difference to him or her?
Sample answer: In SAS for congruence, corresponding sides are congruent, —————————————————————————————————————————
while in SAS for similarity, corresponding sides are proportional. In both, the —————————————————————————————————————————
included angles are congruent.—————————————————————————————————————————
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 114109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 114 6/7/08 3:13:23 PM6/7/08 3:13:23 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Parallel Lines and Proportional Parts7-4
Less
on
7-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 115 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 7-4. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Proportional Parts Within1. ____________________________________________________
Triangles ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Proportional Parts with Parallel2. ____________________________________________________
Lines ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Label the diagrams with the correct terms. (Lesson 7-1)
New Vocabulary Label the diagram with the correct terms.
extreme
mean
extended ratio
Active Vocabulary
mean
extreme
extended ratio
3 − 6 =
29 − 58
4 : 8 : 11
midsegment
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 115109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 115 6/7/08 3:13:28 PM6/7/08 3:13:28 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 116 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the Triangle Proportionality Theorem to find RT.
Model Corollary 7.1 by drawing two transversals on the parallel lines below and writing a proportion. Sample answers are given.
Proportional Parts Within Trianglespp. 484–486
Proportional Parts with Parallel Linespp. 486–488
3.6
6.3 8.4
Step 1: Use the Triangle Proportionality Theorem to write a proportion.
Step 3: Solve the proportion for RT.
Step 2: Substitute the known values into the proportion.
______________________ MQ
− QS
= RT −
RS
______________________RT = 4.8______________________ 3.6
− 6.3
= RT −
8.4
______________________ AB
− BC
= XY −
YZ
m
k
l
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical term is to relate it to other mathematical vocabulary that you already know. What is an easy way to remember the definition of midsegment using other geometric terms?
Sample answer: A midsegment is a segment that connects the midpoints of —————————————————————————————————————————
two sides of a triangle.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 116109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 116 6/7/08 3:13:32 PM6/7/08 3:13:32 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Parts of Similar Triangles7-5
Less
on
7-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 117 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 7-5. Write two facts you learned about parts of similar triangles.
Sample answer: If two triangles are similar, the1. ____________________________________________________
lengths of corresponding altitudes are ____________________________________________________
proportional to the lengths of corresponding sides. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: You can use special segments in2. ____________________________________________________
similar triangles to solve for missing measures. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Label the diagrams with the correct terms. (Lessons 5-1 and 5-2)
50° 50°
altitude
angle bisector
median
angle bisector
altitude
median
Active Vocabulary
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 117109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 117 6/7/08 3:13:37 PM6/7/08 3:13:37 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 118 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use Theorem 7.8 in the student book to solve for BD in the similar triangles below.
Model the Triangle Angle Bisector Theorem by drawing an angle bisector and writing a proportion. Sample answer:
Special Segments of Similar Trianglespp. 495–497
Triangle Angle Bisector Theoremp. 498
15 16 20
Step 1: Use Theorem 7.8 to write a proportion. ______________________
BD −
US = AD
− ST
______________________ BD
− 16
= 15
− 20
______________________BD = 12
Step 2: Substitute the known values into the proportion.
Step 3: Solve the proportion for BD.
______________________ RU
− SU
= RT −
ST
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a large amount of information is to remember key words. What key words will help you remember the features of similar triangles that are proportional to the lengths of the corresponding sides?
Sample answer: perimeters, altitudes, angle bisectors, medians—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 118109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 118 6/7/08 3:13:41 PM6/7/08 3:13:41 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Similarity Transformations7-6
Less
on
7-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 119 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about similarity transformations.
Sample answer: A similarity transformation is a1. ____________________________________________________
transformation that maps a figure onto a similar ____________________________________________________
figure. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: You can use SAS Similarity to2. ____________________________________________________
verify that two figures are similar after a dilation. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
Dilations are performed with respect to a _______________ called the center of dilation.
A dilation is a transformation that _______________ or
_______________ the original figure proportionally.
A dilation with a scale factor ____________________ produces an enlargement.
The scale factor of a dilation describes the _______________ of the dilation.
A similarity transformation is a transformation that maps a
figure onto a _______________ figure.
A dilation with a scale factor _____________________ produces a reduction.
Active Vocabulary
fixed point
enlarges
reduces
greater than 1
extent
similar
between 0 and 1
center of dilation
dilation
enlargement
scale factor of a dilation
similarity transformation
reduction
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 119109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 119 6/7/08 3:13:46 PM6/7/08 3:13:46 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 120 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Model a reduction and an enlargement by drawing a similar triangle on each coordinate grid. Write the scale factor of each dilation. Sample answer:
Reduction Enlargement
Graph the original figure and its dilated image on a sheet of graph paper. Verify that the dilation is a similarity transformation. See students’ work. The transformation is an enlargement with a scale factor of 2.
Preimage: A(0, 0), B(2, 3), C(4, 1)
Image: A′(0, 0), B′(4, 6), C′(8, 2)
Identify Similarity Transformationspp. 505–506
Verify Similarityp. 507
x
y
' '
'
x
y
' '
'
scale factor: __________0.5 scale factor: __________1.5
Helping You Remember A good way to develop a higher understanding of a concept is to compare and contrast it with other similar topics. Compare and contrast similarity transformations with the congruency transformations that you learned about in chapter 6.
Sample answer: Both types of transformations deal with taking a geometric —————————————————————————————————————————
figure (preimage) and mapping it onto an image. With congruency —————————————————————————————————————————
transformations, the image is congruent to the preimage. With similarity —————————————————————————————————————————
transformations, the image is similar to the preimage.—————————————————————————————————————————
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 120109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 120 6/7/08 3:13:49 PM6/7/08 3:13:49 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Scale Drawings and Models7-7
Less
on
7-7
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 121 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 7-7. Write two facts you learned about scale drawings and models.
Sample answer: A scale model is an object with1. ____________________________________________________
lengths proportional to the object it represents. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Scale factors are always written2. ____________________________________________________
so that the model length in the ratio comes first. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
the ratio of a length on a scale model or drawing to————————————————————————————
the actual length of the object being modeled or drawn————————————————————————————
a drawing with lengths proportional to the object————————————————————————————
that it represents————————————————————————————
an object with lengths proportional to the object that————————————————————————————
it represents————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Scale drawings and models have a wide range of applications. For instance, a roadmap is a real world example of a scale drawing. Can you think of other real world examples of scale drawings and scale models?
Sample answers: blueprints, toy models, photographs ————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
scale
scale drawing
scale model
Active Vocabulary
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 121109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 121 6/7/08 3:13:55 PM6/7/08 3:13:55 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 7-7 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 122 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
The scale on a map is 2 centimeters : 15 kilometers. If the distance between two cities on the map is 9 centimeters, find the actual distance between the cities.
Suppose a model airplane has a wingspan of 8 inches. The actual plane has a wingspan of 48 feet.1. What is the scale of the model? ______ in. : ______ ft2. How many times as long as the actual plane is the
model? ______________
Scale Modelspp. 512–513
1 6
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to explain it to someone else. Suppose one of your classmates is having trouble understanding how to use the scale on a map to calculate actual distances. How can you explain the procedure to her?
Sample answer: Use a ruler to measure the distance on the map. Set up a —————————————————————————————————————————
proportion to solve for the actual distance. Use the scale of the map (map —————————————————————————————————————————
distance : actual distance) to write one ratio. Use the ratio measured distance : —————————————————————————————————————————
unknown actual distance as the other. Solve.—————————————————————————————————————————
Method 1 Method 2
Write a proportion using the scale.
Write an equation using the number of kilometers per centimeters.
______________________ 2 cm
− 15 km
= 9 cm
− x km
______________________
a = 15
− 2 m
Solve the proportion. Solve the equation. Substitute 9 for m.
______________________x = 67.5 km ______________________a = 67.5 km
1 − 72
Check Check
109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 122109-122_GEOSNC07_890858.indd 122 6/7/08 3:13:58 PM6/7/08 3:13:58 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 123 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a phrase or formula from the chapter.
Proportions and Similarity
Definition
corresponding angles congruent corresponding sides proportional
Definition
transformation in which a figure is reduced or enlarged
Definition
an object with lengths proportional to the object it represents
Equivalent Proportions
a −
b =
c −
d ,
b −
a =
d −
c ,
a −
c =
b −
d ,
c −
a =
d −
b
Ratio
Algebra
Similar Triangles
Cross Products
If a −
b =
c −
d ,
then ad = bc.
• Triangle Proportionality
• Triangle Midsegment
• Proportional Parts of Parallel Lines
• Congruent Parts of Parallel Lines
• Special Segments Proportionality
• Triangle Angle Bisector
DilationsScale
Drawings
TheoremsSimilar Polygons
Theorems
AASSSSAS
Properties
ReflexiveSymmetricTransitive
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec6:123001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec6:123 6/14/08 12:44:21 AM6/14/08 12:44:21 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 7 124 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 7.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 7 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 7 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Complete reading assignments before class. Write down or circle any questions you may
have about what was in the text.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
Proportions and Similarity
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec6:124001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec6:124 6/14/08 12:44:25 AM6/14/08 12:44:25 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 125 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about right triangles and trigonometry. List three things you already know about them in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about them in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When searching for the main idea of a lesson, ask yourself, “What is this
paragraph or lesson telling me?”
• When you take notes, include definitions of new terms, explanations of new concepts, and examples of problems.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
Right Triangles and Trigonometry
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec7:125001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec7:125 6/14/08 12:47:27 AM6/14/08 12:47:27 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 126 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on geometric mean, one fact might be the geometric mean between two numbers is the positive square root of their product. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Right Triangles and Trigonometry
Lesson Fact
8-1 Geometric Mean See students’ work.
8-2 The Pythagorean Theorem and Its Converse
8-3 Special Right Triangles
8-4 Trigonometry
8-5 Angles of Elevation
8-6 The Law of Sines and Law of Cosines
8-7 Vectors
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec7:126001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec7:126 6/14/08 12:47:32 AM6/14/08 12:47:32 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-1
NAME DATE PERIOD
Geometric Mean8-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 127 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 8-1. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to find the geometric mean1. ____________________________________________________
of two numbers ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to solve problems involving 2. ____________________________________________________
right triangles using the geometric mean ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lesson 7-1)
an equation stating that two ratios are equal
the numbers a and d in the proportion a − b = c −
d
the numbers b and c in the proportion a − b = c −
d
New Vocabulary Complete each statement by filling in the blank with the correct term or phrase or writing the correct formula.
The geometric mean of two positive numbers a and b is the
number x such that .
The measure of the altitude drawn from the vertex of a right
triangle to its hypotenuse is the geometric mean between
the measures of the two segments of the ________________.
The geometric mean of two positive numbers a and b can be
calculated using the expression .
proportion
means
extremes
geometric mean
Active Vocabulary
hypotenuse
x = √ �� ab
a − x = x −
b
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 127127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 127 6/7/08 2:26:05 PM6/7/08 2:26:05 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 128 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Find the geometric mean between 8 and 18.
__________________ definition of geometric mean
__________________ Substitute for a and b.
__________________ Multiply.
__________________ Simplify.
Model Theorem 8.2, the Geometric Mean (Altitude) Theorem, by drawing a segment on right triangle DEF and writing a proportion. Sample answers are given.
Geometric Meanp. 531
Geometric Means in Right Trianglespp. 531–534
x = √ �� ab
x = √ �� 8·18
x = √ �� 144
x = 12
90°
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical concept is to relate it to something you already know. How can the meaning of mean in a proportion help you to remember how to find the geometric mean between two numbers?
Sample answer: Write a proportion in which the two means are equal. This —————————————————————————————————————————
common mean is the geometric mean between the two extremes.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
_______________________FK = √ ���� DK · KE
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 128127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 128 6/7/08 2:26:08 PM6/7/08 2:26:08 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-2
NAME DATE PERIOD
The Pythagorean Theorem and Its Converse8-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 129 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 8-2. Write two facts you learned about the Pythagorean Theorem and its converse as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: In a right triangle, the sum of the 1. ____________________________________________________
squares of the lengths of the legs is equal to the ____________________________________________________
square of the length of the hypotenuse. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: The converse of the Pythagorean 2. ____________________________________________________
Theorem can be used to help you determine ____________________________________________________
whether a triangle is a right triangle given the ____________________________________________________
measures of all three sides. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lesson 1-5)
The geometric mean of two ________________ numbers a
and b can be calculated using the expression x = √ �� ab .
The measure of the ________________ drawn from the
vertex of the right triangle to its hypotenuse is the
geometric mean between the measures of the two
segments of the hypotenuse.
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term.
a set of three nonzero whole numbers a, b, and c,————————————————————————————
such that a2 + b2 = c2
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
geometric mean
Pythagorean triple
altitude
positive
Active Vocabulary
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 129127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 129 6/7/08 2:26:11 PM6/7/08 2:26:11 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 130 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Circle each set of numbers that is a Pythagorean triple.
1. 6, 8, 10 2. 7, 21, 25 3. 5, 12, 13
4. 24, 45, 51 5. 14, 48, 50 6. 10, 15, 17
7. 21, 72, 75 8. 16, 30, 36 9. 15, 36, 39
Fill in each blank to complete the converse of the Pythagorean Theorem.
The Pythagorean Theorempp. 541–544
Converse of the Pythagorean Theorempp. 544–545
Helping You Remember Many students who studied geometry long ago remember the Pythagorean Theorem as the equation a2 + b2 = c2, but cannot tell you what this equation means. A formula is useless if you don’t know what it means and how to use it. How could you help someone who has forgotten the Pythagorean Theorem remember the meaning of the equation a2 + b2 = c2?
Sample answer: Draw a right triangle. Label the lengths of the two legs as a —————————————————————————————————————————
and b and the length of the hypotenuse as c.—————————————————————————————————————————
a c
b
Converse of the Pythagorean TheoremWords If the sum of the ____________ of the lengths of
the shortest sides of a triangle is equal to the
square of the length of the ____________ side,
then the triangle is a right triangle.
Symbols If a2 + b2 = c2, then _________________________.
squares
�ABC is a right triangle
longest
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 130127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 130 6/7/08 2:26:16 PM6/7/08 2:26:16 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-3
NAME DATE PERIOD
Special Right Triangles8-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 131 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to use the properties of 1. ____________________________________________________
45º-45º-90º triangles ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the properties of 2. ____________________________________________________
30º-60º-90º triangles ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Quadrilateral ABCD is a square with side lengths s. Fill in each blank to show what you know about the figure.
AB = ________
m∠ADC = ________
m∠ACD = ________
AC = ________
Triangle LMN is equilateral with side lengths 2s. Fill in each blank to show what you know about the figure.
ON = ________
m∠OLN = ________
m∠LNO = ________
LO = ________
s
2s
s
90°
45°
s √ � 2
s
30°
60°
√ � 3
Active Vocabulary
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 131127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 131 6/7/08 6:40:26 AM6/7/08 6:40:26 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 132 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Fill in each blank and label the figure to illustrate the 45º-45º-90º Triangle Theorem.
Solve for q and s in the figure below.
Properties of 45º-45º-90º Trianglespp. 552–553
Properties of 30º-60º-90º Trianglespp. 553–555
Helping You Remember Some students find it easier to remember mathematical concepts in terms of specific numbers rather than variables. How can you use specific numbers to help you remember the relationship between the lengths of the three sides in a 30º-60º-90º triangle?
Sample answer: Draw a 30º-60º-90º triangle. Label the length of the shorter leg —————————————————————————————————————————
as 1. Then the length of the hypotenuse is 2, and the length of the longer leg —————————————————————————————————————————
is √ � 3 . Just remember 1, 2, √ � 3 .—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
45°
45°
�
�
�2
60°
15s
q
45º-45º-90º Triangle Theorem
In a 45º-45º-90º triangle, the legs ℓ
are ______________ and the length
of the hypotenuse h is ___________
times the length of a leg.
congruent
√ � 2
q = ____________7.5
7.5 √ � 3 s = ____________
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 132127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 132 6/7/08 2:26:38 PM6/7/08 2:26:38 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-4
NAME DATE PERIOD
Trigonometry8-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 133 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 8-4. Predict two things you think you will learn about trigonometry.
Sample answer: how to find the sine, cosine, and 1. ____________________________________________________
tangent ratios for angles in a right triangle ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use trigonometric ratios to 2. ____________________________________________________
find lengths ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
the ratio of the opposite leg to the hypotenuse of a right triangle
the measure of ∠A if sin A is known
the study of triangle measurement
the measure of ∠A if tan A is known
the ratio of the adjacent leg to the hypotenuse of a right triangle
the measure of ∠A if cos A is known
a ratio of the lengths of two sides of a right triangle
the ratio of the opposite leg to the adjacent leg of a right triangle
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
sine
inverse sine
trigonometry
inverse tangent
cosine
inverse cosine
trigonometric ratio
tangent
Active Vocabulary
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 133127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 133 6/7/08 2:26:43 PM6/7/08 2:26:43 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 134 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the statements to show the trigonometric ratios for angles H and K.
sin H =
sin K =
cos H =
cos K =
tan H =
tan K =
Use a calculator to find m∠F to the nearest tenth.
Trigonometric Ratiospp. 562–564
Use Inverse Trigonometric Ratiospp. 564–566
Helping You Remember How can the co in cosine help you remember the relationship between the sines and the cosines of the two acute angles of a right triangle?
Sample answer: The co in cosine comes from complement, as in —————————————————————————————————————————
complementary angles. The cosine of an acute angle is equal to the sine of its —————————————————————————————————————————
complement.—————————————————————————————————————————
16
9 m∠F ≈_________34.2
k �
h
h − �
k − �
k − �
h − �
h − k
k − h
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 134127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 134 6/7/08 2:26:45 PM6/7/08 2:26:45 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-5
NAME DATE PERIOD
Angles of Elevation and Depression8-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 135 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about angles of elevation and depression.
Sample answer: An angle of elevation is the angle 1. ____________________________________________________
formed by a horizontal line and an observer’s line ____________________________________________________
of sight to an object above the horizontal line. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: You can use inverse trigonometric2. ____________________________________________________
ratios to solve for angles of elevation and ____________________________________________________
depression if you know two of the side lengths. ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
the angle formed by a horizontal line and an ————————————————————————————
observer’s line of sight to an object above the ————————————————————————————
horizontal line————————————————————————————
the angle formed by a horizontal line and an ————————————————————————————
observer’s line of sight to an object below the ————————————————————————————
horizontal line————————————————————————————
Vocabulary Link What are some real-world examples of angles of elevation and depression?
Sample answer: When a plane takes off, its climb ————————————————————————————
forms an angle of elevation. When a plane lands, it ————————————————————————————
comes in at an angle of depression.————————————————————————————
angle of elevation
angle of depression
Active Vocabulary
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 135127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 135 6/7/08 2:26:50 PM6/7/08 2:26:50 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 136 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
A plane takes off and climbs at an angle of elevation of 35º. How high above the ground is the plane after traveling 250 yards? Model the situation with a diagram and solve. Sample answer is given.
Solve for x in the figure below.
Angles of Elevation and Depressionpp. 574–575
Two Angles of Elevation or Depressionpp. 575–576
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to explain it to someone else. Suppose a classmate finds it difficult to distinguish between angles of elevation and angles of depression. What are some hints you can give her to get it right every time?
Sample answers: (1) The angle of depression and the angle of elevation are —————————————————————————————————————————
both measured between the horizontal and the line of sight. (2) The angle of —————————————————————————————————————————
depression is always congruent to the angle of elevation in the same diagram. —————————————————————————————————————————
(3) Associate the word elevation with the word up and the word depression —————————————————————————————————————————
with the word down.—————————————————————————————————————————
20°
25°
20 m
x
35°
250 ydh
sin 35° = h −
250
250(sin 35°) = h
143.4 ≈ h
about 143.4 yards
x ≈ __________22.9 m
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 136127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 136 6/7/08 2:26:53 PM6/7/08 2:26:53 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-6
NAME DATE PERIOD
The Law of Sines and Law of Cosines8-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 137 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 8-6. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Law of Sines1. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Law of Cosines2. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two. (Lesson 1-5)
the angle formed by a horizontal line and an observer’s line of sight to an object above the horizontal line
the ratio of the opposite leg to the adjacent leg of a right triangle
the angle formed by a horizontal line and an observer’s line of sight to an object above the horizontal line
the ratio of the adjacent leg to the hypotenuse of a right triangle
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
You can use the Law of Sines to solve a ________________ if
you know the measures of ________________ and
________________ (AAS). If given ASA, use the Triangle
Angle Sum Theorem to find the measure of the
________________.
You can use the Law of Cosines to solve a triangle if you
know the measures of two ________________ and the
__________________ (SAS).
tangent
angle of depression
cosine
angle of elevation
Law of Sines
Law of Cosines
Active Vocabulary
triangle
any side
two angles
third angle
sides
included angle
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 137127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 137 6/7/08 2:26:56 PM6/7/08 2:26:56 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 138 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the statement below to illustrate the Law of Sines for �ABC.
Use the Law of Cosines to solve for x to the nearest tenth.
Law of Sinespp. 582–583
Law of Cosinespp. 583–585
Helping You Remember Many students remember mathematical equations and formulas better if they can state them in words. State the Law of Sines in your own words without using variables or mathematical symbols.
Sample answer: In any triangle, the ratio of the sine of an angle to the length of —————————————————————————————————————————
the opposite side is the same for all three angles.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
Law of Sines
If �ABC has lengths a, b, and c, representing the length of the sides opposite the angles with measures A, B, and C, then
sin A
− a =
sin B −
b =
sin C −
c
c b
a
18
15x
12
_____________x ≈ 41.4°
.
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 138127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 138 6/7/08 2:26:59 PM6/7/08 2:26:59 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
8-7
NAME DATE PERIOD
Vectors8-7
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 139 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
Skim the Examples for Lesson 8-7. Predict two things you think you will learn about vectors.
Sample answer: how to write vectors in 1. ____________________________________________________
component form ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the direction and 2. ____________________________________________________
magnitude of a vector ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
a description of a vector in terms of its horizontal change x and vertical change y from its initial point to its terminal point
the angle that is formed with the x-axis or any other horizontal line
the length of the vector from its initial point to its terminal point
a way to find the sum of two vectors using a parallelogram
the sum of two vectors
a vector that is placed in the coordinate plane with its initial point at the origin
a way to find the sum of two vectors using a triangle
a quantity that has both magnitude and direction
component form
direction
magnitude
parallelogram method
resultant
standard position
triangle method
vector
Active Vocabulary
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 139127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 139 6/7/08 2:27:03 PM6/7/08 2:27:03 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 8-7 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 140 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Write the component form of ⎯⎯⎯ � ST .
Model the parallelogram method and the triangle method below by drawing two vectors and showing the resultant. Sample answers are shown.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical term is to relate it to a term you already know. You learned about scale factors when you studied similarity and dilations. How is the idea of a scalar related to scale factors?
Sample answer: A scalar is the term used for a constant (a specific real —————————————————————————————————————————
number) when working with vectors. A vector has both magnitude and —————————————————————————————————————————
direction, while a scalar is just a magnitude. Multiplying a vector by a positive —————————————————————————————————————————
scalar changes the magnitude of the vector, but not the direction, so it —————————————————————————————————————————
represents a change in scale.—————————————————————————————————————————
Describe Vectorspp. 593–594
Vector Additionpp. 594–596
Parallelogram Method Triangle Method
y
x
⟨7, 6⟩
127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 140127-140_GEOSNC08_890858.indd 140 6/7/08 2:27:06 PM6/7/08 2:27:06 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 141 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a term or formula from the chapter.
Right Triangles and Trigonometry
Right Triangles
Notation Diagram/Examples
Similar Right Triangles
Geometric Mean a −
x = x −
b
3 −
x = x −
15 ; x2 = 45; x = 3 √ � 5
Right Triangle Geometric Mean Theorem
x − h =
h −
y ;
c −
b =
b −
x
PythagorasPythagorean Theorem a2 + b2 = c2
Pythagorean InequalityTheorems
c2 < a2 + b2: acute
c2 > a2 + b2: obtuse
Special Right Triangles45°-45°-90° ℓ = ℓ, h = ℓ √ � 2
30°-60°-90° h = 2s and ℓ = s √ � 3
TrigonometryRatios sin A =
opp −
hyp
cos A = adj
− hyp
tan A = opp
− adj
Law of Sines
Law of Cosines
sin A
− a =
sin B −
b =
sin C −
c
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A
a b
cy x
h
a
b
c
a
c
b
45°
45°
�
�
� 2
60°
30°
s2s
s 3
adj hyp
opp
b c
a
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec7:141001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec7:141 6/14/08 12:44:30 AM6/14/08 12:44:30 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 8 142 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 8.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 8 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 8 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • While note-taking use abbreviations to use less time and room. Write neatly and place a
question mark by any information that you do not understand.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
Right Triangles and Trigonometry
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec7:142001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec7:142 6/14/08 12:44:39 AM6/14/08 12:44:39 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 9 143 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, respond to these statements.1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • At the end of each lesson, write a summary of the lesson, or write in your own
words what the lesson was about.
• As you read each lesson, list examples of ways the new knowledge has been or will be in your daily life.
Transformations and Symmetry
Before You Read Transformations and Symmetry
See students’ work.
• The orientation of an image that undergoes a reflection stays the same.
• The image after a 180º rotation is equal to the original image.
• An image after 2 reflections in parallel lines is equal to a translation.
• Vectors can be used to define translations.
• Dilations can have positive or negative scale factors.
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec8:143001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec8:143 6/14/08 12:47:36 AM6/14/08 12:47:36 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 9 144 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on symmetry, one fact might be the number of times a figure maps onto itself as it rotates from 0° to 360° is called the order of symmetry. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Transformations and Symmetry
Lesson Fact
9-1 Reflections See students’ work.
9-2 Translations
9-3 Rotations
9-4 Compositions of Transformations
9-5 Symmetry
9-6 Dilations
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec8:144001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec8:144 6/14/08 12:47:42 AM6/14/08 12:47:42 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Reflections9-1
Less
on
9-1
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 145 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 9-1. Write two facts you learned about reflections as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: To reflect a polygon in a line, 1. ____________________________________________________
reflect each of the polygon’s vertices. Then ____________________________________________________
connect the reflected vertices with line segments. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: To reflect a point in the x-axis, 2. ____________________________________________________
multiply its y-coordinate by –1. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term. (Lesson 7-2)
polygons that have the same shape but not ————————————————————————————
necessarily the same size————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Label the diagram with the correct term.
Vocabulary Link When you look into a mirror, you see your reflection. Explain how this relates to reflections in geometry.
Sample answer: Each point of your image in the ————————————————————————————
mirror appears to be the same distance from each ————————————————————————————
point on the preimage.————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
line of reflection
similar polygons
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 145145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 145 6/7/08 3:16:27 PM6/7/08 3:16:27 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 9-1 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 146 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Reflect �ABC in the line shown.
Describe the similarities and differences between reflecting a point in the x-axis and reflecting a point in the y-axis.
Similarities Sample answer: Both methods result in a——————————————————————
point being equidistant from one of the axes on a ————————————————————————————
coordinate grid.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Differences Sample answer: To reflect a point in the——————————————————————
x-axis, you multiply its y-coordinate by -1. To ————————————————————————————
reflect a point in the y-axis, you multiply its ————————————————————————————
x-coordinate by -1.————————————————————————————
Draw Reflectionspp. 615–616
Draw Reflections in the Coordinate Planepp. 616–618
'
'
'
Helping You Remember Sometimes it is helpful to put a geometric concept into your own words to help you remember it. Explain in your own words how you can reflect a point (x, y) in the line y = x.
Sample answer: To reflect a point (x, y) in the line y = x, interchange the —————————————————————————————————————
coordinates. The reflected image is the point (y, x). —————————————————————————————————————
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 146145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 146 6/7/08 3:16:30 PM6/7/08 3:16:30 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Translations9-2
Less
on
9-2
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 147 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 9-2. Predict two things you think you will learn about translations.
Sample answer: how to draw a translation given 1. ____________________________________________________
a figure and a translation vector ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to perform translations in the 2. ____________________________________________________
coordinate plane ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lesson 8-7)
a quantity that has both magnitude and direction
the length of the vector from its initial point to its terminal point
a description of a vector in terms of its horizontal change x and vertical change y from its initial point to its terminal point
a vector that is placed in the coordinate plane with its initial point at the origin
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
A translation maps each point to its image along a , called the translation vector, such that
• each joining a point and its image has the same as the vector, and
• this segment is also to the vector.
vector
magnitude
component form
standard position
translation vector
parallel
vector
segment
length
Active Vocabulary
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 147145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 147 6/7/08 3:16:37 PM6/7/08 3:16:37 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 9-2 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 148 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Draw the translation of �RST along the translation vector.
Complete the following table to demonstrate how to translate a point in the coordinate plane.
WordsTo translate a point along vector (a, b), add a to the x-coordinate and b to the
y-coordinate.
Symbols (x, y) → (x + a, y + b)
Example The image of point R(2, 9) translated along
vector (1, -4) is (3, 5).
Draw Reflectionspp. 615–616
Draw Reflections in the Coordinate Planepp. 616–618
'
'
'
v⇀
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical term is to relate it to an everyday meaning of the same word. How is the meaning of translation in geometry related to the idea of translation from one language to another?
Sample answer: When you translate from one language to another, you carry —————————————————————————————————————————
over the meaning from one language to another. When you translate —————————————————————————————————————————
a geometric figure, you carry over the figure from one position to another —————————————————————————————————————————
without changing its basic orientation.—————————————————————————————————————————
.
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 148145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 148 6/7/08 3:16:39 PM6/7/08 3:16:39 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Rotations9-3
Less
on
9-3
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 149 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 9-3. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: what it means to rotate a point 1. ____________________________________________________
about a fixed point ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to draw rotations clockwise 2. ____________________________________________________
and counterclockwise in the coordinate plane ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
A rotation about a , called the center of rotation, through an angle of x˚ maps a point to its image such that
• if the point is the center of rotation, then the image and preimage are the , or
• if the point is not the center of rotation than the image and preimage are the same from the center of rotation. The measure of the angle of rotation formed by the preimage, center of rotation, and image points is x.
Vocabulary Link Describe some real-world examples of rotations that you have encountered.
Sample answers: tires on a car or a bike, Ferris ————————————————————————————
wheel, CD or DVD player————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
center of rotation
angle of rotation
fixed point
same point
distance
Active Vocabulary
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 149145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 149 6/7/08 3:16:44 PM6/7/08 3:16:44 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 9-3 (continued)
PDF-2nd
Chapter 9 150 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Draw a 90˚ counterclockwise rotation of �ABC about point D.
Fill in the boxes to describe the rotation of �DEF about the origin. Include the angle of rotation and the direction.
Draw Rotationspp. 632–633
Draw Rotations in the Coordinate Planepp. 633–634
preimage
180˚ clockwise or 180˚ counter-clockwise
90˚ clockwise or 270˚ counter-clockwise
270˚ clockwise or 90˚ counter-clockwise
'
'
'
y
x
'
'
'
'
''
'
'
'
8642
−4−6−8
−2−4−6−8 2 4 6 8
Helping You Remember A good way to help you remember a concept in geometry is to explain it to someone else. Suppose a classmate is having difficulty remembering how to find the coordinates of a point after a 180˚ rotation about the origin. How would you explain it to him?
Sample answer: Multiply the x- and y-coordinates by –1.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 150145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 150 6/11/08 7:44:04 PM6/11/08 7:44:04 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Less
on
9-4
Compositions of Transformations9-4
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 151 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 9-4. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Glide Reflections1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Compositions of Two Reflections2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Match the term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two. (Lesson 1-5)
a line such that the points of a preimage and its image are the same distance from the line
the object that determines the distance and direction that a preimage is slid to create its image
the point about which a preimage is turned to create its image
the amount a preimage is turned to create its image
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
the result when a transformation is applied to a figure and then another transformation is applied to its image
the composition of a translation followed by a reflection in a line parallel to the translation vector
center of rotation
line of reflection
angle of rotation
translation vector
Active Vocabulary
composition of transformations
glide reflection
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 151145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 151 6/7/08 3:16:52 PM6/7/08 3:16:52 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 9-4 (continued)
PDF-2nd
Chapter 9 152 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Describe the composition of transformations that lead to �A�B�C�.
State the type of transformation that is achieved by each of the following compositions.
Compositions of Transformations
Glide Refl ection Translation Rotations
the composition of a reflection
and a translation
the composition of two reflections in
parallel lines
the composition of two reflections
in intersecting lines
Glide Reflectionspp. 641–642
Compositions of Two Reflectionspp. 642–644
translated down 10 units, then
refl ected in the y-axis
y
x
''''
'
''
''
8642
−4−6−8
−2−4−6−8 2 4 6 8
Helping You Remember Theorem 9.1 in the student text states that the composition of two or more isometries is also an isometry. Describe what this means in your own words, and state a property of congruence that leads to this theorem.
Sample answer: An isometry is a transformation that preserves congruence. —————————————————————————————————————————
So, Theorem 9.1 states that the composition of two or more refl ections, —————————————————————————————————————————
translations, or rotations, results in an image that is congruent to its preimage. —————————————————————————————————————————
This is suggested by the Transitive Property of Congruence.—————————————————————————————————————————
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 152145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 152 6/11/08 7:45:17 PM6/11/08 7:45:17 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Symmetry9-5
Less
on
9-5
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 153 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to identify line and rotational 1. ____________________________________________________
symmetries in two-dimensional figures ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to identify line and rotational 2. ____________________________________________________
symmetries in three-dimensional figures ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
also called the axis of symmetry
also called the point of symmetry
the number of times a figure maps onto itself as it rotates from 0˚ to 360˚
the characteristic of a figure if there exists a rigid motion that maps the figure onto itself
the smallest angle through which a figure can be rotated so that it maps onto itself
the characteristic of a figure if the figure can be mapped onto itself by a reflection in a line
the characteristic of a figure if the figure can be mapped onto itself by a rotation between 0˚ and 360˚
Vocabulary Link Symmetry is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of symmetry using a dictionary. Describe how the definition of symmetry can help you remember the mathematical definition of symmetry.
Sample answers: corresponding in shape, size, and ————————————————————————————relative position on opposite sides of a dividing line; ————————————————————————————A figure has symmetry when it can be mapped onto ————————————————————————————itself, which results in a figure with the same shape ————————————————————————————and size.————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
line of symmetry
center of symmetry
order of symmetry
symmetry
magnitude of symmetry
line symmetry
rotational symmetry
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 153145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 153 6/7/08 3:16:59 PM6/7/08 3:16:59 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 9-5 (continued)
PDF-2nd
Chapter 9 154 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Circle the figures that have rotational symmetry.
1. 2.
3. 4.
State whether the figure below has plane symmetry, axis symmetry, both, or neither.
Symmetry in Two-Dimensional Figurespp. 653–654
Symmetry in Three-Dimensional Figuresp. 655 Step 1: Can the figure be mapped onto
itself by a reflection in a plane? yes
Step 3: What kind of symmetry does the figure have? both
Step 2: Can the figure be mapped onto itself by a rotation between 0˚ and 360˚ in a line? yes
Helping You Remember What is an easy way to remember the order and magnitude of the rotational symmetry of a regular polygon?
Sample answer: The order is the same as the number of sides. To find the —————————————————————————————————————————
magnitude, divide 360˚ by the number of sides.—————————————————————————————————————————
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 154145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 154 6/10/08 11:12:47 PM6/10/08 11:12:47 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Dilations9-6
Less
on
9-6
PDF-Pass
Chapter 9 155 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about dilations.
Sample answer: A dilation is a similarity 1. ____________________________________________________
transformation that enlarges or reduces a figure ____________________________________________________
proportionally. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: To find the coordinates of an 2. ____________________________________________________
image after a dilation centered at the origin, ____________________________________________________
multiply the coordinates by the scale factor of the ____________________________________________________
dilation. ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary State whether the dilation from figure B to B′ is an enlargement or a reduction. Then find the scale factor of the dilation.
type of dilation: ________________
scale factor: ________________
Vocabulary Link Describe how the pupils of your eyes serve as a real-world example of dilation in different lighting conditions.
Sample answer: The pupil enlarges about the center ————————————————————————————
in low light to allow more light to enter. It reduces in ————————————————————————————
bright light to allow less light in.————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
enlargement
2.5
6
4
'
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 155145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 155 6/7/08 3:17:07 PM6/7/08 3:17:07 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 9-6 (continued)
PDF-2nd
Chapter 9 156 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Draw the image of �ABC under a dilation with center D and scale factor 2.5.
Model a reduction by giving the coordinates of segment R′S′ and plotting it on the coordinate grid. Tell what scale factor you used in your reduction. Sample answer: scale: 0.5
Draw Dilationspp. 660–662
Dilations in the Coordinate Planep. 662
' '
'
y
x'
'
89
765
1234
−1−2−3−4−5−6−7−8−9
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new concept in geometry is to explain it to someone else in your own words. How would you describe the process of dilating a point (x, y) about the origin by a scale factor k?
Sample answer: Multiply the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the point by k to —————————————————————————————————————————
produce the image (kx, ky).—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 156145_156_GEOSNC09_890858.indd 156 6/11/08 7:46:34 PM6/11/08 7:46:34 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 9 157 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a term or formula from the chapter.
Transformations and Symmetry
Transformations
Reflection
Rotation
DilationTranslation
Composition
y-axis(x, y) → (-x, y)
x-axis(x, y) → (x, -y)
y = x(x, y) → (-y, x)
(x, y) → (x + a, y + b) (x, y) → (kx, ky)
90°(x, y) → (-y, x)
180°(x, y) → (-x, -y)
Glide Reflection 270°(x, y) → (y, -x)
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec8:157001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec8:157 6/14/08 1:36:23 AM6/14/08 1:36:23 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 9 158 Glencoe Geometry
Now that you have read and worked through the chapter, think about what you have learned and complete the table below. Compare your previous answers with these.
1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 9.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 9 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 9 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • On test day, look over the entire test to get an idea of its length and scope so that you
can pace yourself. Answer what you know first, skipping over material you do not know. When finished, go back and check for errors. Don’t change an answer unless you are certain you are correct.
Transformations and Symmetry
Transformation and Symmetry After You Read
• The orientation of an image that undergoes a reflection stays the same.
D
• The image after a 180° rotation is equal to the original image.
D
• An image after 2 reflections in parallel lines is equal to a translation.
A
• Vectors can be used to define translations. A
• Dilations can have positive or negative scale factors. A
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec8:158001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec8:158 6/14/08 1:37:23 AM6/14/08 1:37:23 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 159 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about circles. List three things you already know about them in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about them in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, record real-life examples of how you can use fractions,
decimals, and percents, such as telling time and making change.
• When you take notes, listen or read for main ideas. Then record those ideas for future reference.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
Circles
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec9:159001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec9:159 6/14/08 12:47:46 AM6/14/08 12:47:46 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 160 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on measuring angles and arcs, one fact might be a central angle is an angle with a vertex in the center of the circle. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Circles
Lesson Fact
10-1 Circles and Circumference See students’ work.
10-2 Measuring Angles and Arcs
10-3 Arcs and Chords
10-4 Inscribed Angles
10-5 Tangents
10-6 Secants, Tangents, and Angle Measures
10-7 Special Segments in a Circle
10-8 Equations of a Circle
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec9:160001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec9:160 6/14/08 12:47:51 AM6/14/08 12:47:51 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
10-
1
NAME DATE PERIOD
Circles and Circumference10-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 161 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to identify parts of a circle1. ____________________________________________________
——————————————————————————
Sample answer: how to find the circumference of2. ____________________________________________________
a circle ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
the distance around the circle
a segment with endpoints at the center and on the circle
the locus or set of all points in a plane equidistant from a given point
two coplanar circles that have the same center
a chord which passes though the center of a circle and is made up of collinear radii
an irrational number which by definition is the ratio of the circumference of a circle to the diameter of the circle
descriptor give to a polygon which is drawn inside a circle such that all of its vertices lie on the circle
the name used to describe the given point in the definition of a circle
a segment with endpoints on the circle
descriptor given to a circle which is drawn about a polygon such that the circle contains all of the vertices of the polygon
two circles with congruent radii
circumference
radius
circle
concentric circles
diameter
pi (π)
inscribed
center
chord
circumscribed
congruent circles
Active Vocabulary
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 161161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 161 6/7/08 2:27:58 PM6/7/08 2:27:58 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 162 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Compare and contrast the pairs of special segments of a circle in the diagram below.
The circumference of a circle is 234 inches. Determine the radius and the diameter of the circle to the nearest hundredth inch.
A diameter is a chord that must go through the center of the circle.
The diameter of a circle is made up of two collinear radii, thus its measure is twice that of the radius. In addition, you can say that the radius is half of the diameter.
Start withC = πd, and fill
in what you know.
234 = πd
Determine the radius.
r = 1 − 2 (74.48)
r = 37.24 in.
Segments in a circlepp. 683–685
Circumferencepp. 685–686
A radius is not a chord because a radius does not have both endpoints on the circle.
Solve for the unknown.
234 = πdd ≈ 74.48 in.
Helping You Remember Look up the origins of the two parts of the word diameter in your dictionary. Explain the meaning of each part and give a term you already know that shares the origin of that part.
Sample answer: The first part comes from dia, which means across or through, —————————————————————————————————————————
as in diagonal. The second part comes from metron, which means measure.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
Chord
DiameterRadius
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 162161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 162 6/7/08 2:28:00 PM6/7/08 2:28:00 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
10-
2
NAME DATE PERIOD
Measuring Angles and Arcs10-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 163 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 10-2. Write two facts you learned about measuring angles and arcs as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: A circle has 360 degrees.1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: An arc is a portion of a circle2. ____________________________________________________
defined by two endpoints. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Label the diagram with the terms listed at the left.
central angle
arc
minor arc
major arc
semicircle
congruent arcs
adjacent arcs
Active Vocabulary
x
y
x
y
congruent arcs
major arc
central angle
minor arc
semicircle
adjacent arcs
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 163161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 163 6/7/08 2:28:03 PM6/7/08 2:28:03 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 164 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Given the m∠EJD = 15, find each measure in � J in the order specified. Justify your answer.
Find the length of � BC and � BDC . The radius of � A is 5 centimeters. What is the relationship between the two arc lengths?
Relationship: The sum of the arcs is equal to the
circumference of the circle.
Angles and Arcspp. 692–694
Arc Lengthp. 695
100°
m � BC = 8.73 cm
m � BDC = 22.69 cm
m � ED = 15
The measure of a
minor arc is equal
to the measure of
its central angle.
m � EDH = 105
The measure is
equal to the sum of
two adjacent arcs:
90 + 15.
m � GH = 75
Because EHG is a
semicircle, you
can do 180 - 105.
m � EFG = 180
It is a semicircle
because EG is a
diameter.
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 164161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 164 6/7/08 2:28:07 PM6/7/08 2:28:07 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
10-
3
NAME DATE PERIOD
Arcs and Chords10-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 165 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 10-3. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Arcs and Chords1. ____________________________________________________
——————————————————————————
Sample answer: Bisecting Arcs and Chords2. ____________________________________________________
——————————————————————————
Review Vocabulary In the circle provided, draw a chord which is not a diameter using a regular line, a diameter using a heavy line, and a radius using a dashed line. Identify 3 arcs that were created on the circle. (Lessons 10-1 and 10-2)Sample answers are given.
Details
Find the value of x.
What is PO? What is MN?
What realtionship exists between � PO and � MN ?
The arcs are congruent.————————————————————————————
Arcs
� FE
� DCB
� DC
Active Vocabulary
3x + 7 = 5x - 9
x = 8
31
Use the definition of congruence to write an equation. Solve the equation for x.
31
3x + 7
5x - 9
Arcs and Chordspp. 701–702
Main Idea
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 165161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 165 6/7/08 2:28:11 PM6/7/08 2:28:11 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 166 Glencoe Geometry
Details
Use the diagram below to state Theorems 10.3 and 10.4, from the student book, in your own words.
Theorem 10.3 � AB is a diameter of the circle and � NP is a
chord, therefore, � AB is a perpendicular bisector of � NP .
Theorem 10.4 Because NO is congruent to OP, AB is
its perpendicular bisector, which means � AB is a
diameter of the circle.
Bisecting Arcs and Chordspp. 702–704
Helping You Remember Writing a mathematical concept in your own words can help you better remember the concept. Describe Theorem 10.5, from the student book, in your own words.
Sample answer: If two chords in a circle are congruent, and you draw a—————————————————————————————————————————
segment perpendicular to the 1st chord with the center of the circle as the—————————————————————————————————————————
other endpoint, it will be the same length as the segment perpendicular from—————————————————————————————————————————
the 2nd chord to the center.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
Main Idea
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 166161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 166 6/7/08 2:28:15 PM6/7/08 2:28:15 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Inscribed Angles10-4
Less
on
10-
4
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 167 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 10-4. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and figures.
Sample answer: three ways that an angle can1. ____________________________________________________
be inscribed in a circle ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: the definition of an inscribed2. ____________________________________________________
polygon ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Complete the chart below. (Lesson 6-1)
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term.
an angle which has a vertex on a circle and sides that————————————————————————————
contain chords on the circle————————————————————————————
an arc which has endpoints on the sides of an inscribed————————————————————————————
angle and lies in the interior of an inscribed angle————————————————————————————
inscribed angle
intercepted arc
Active Vocabulary
Regular Polygons
5-sidespentagon
6-sideshexagon
sum of interior angles720°
sum of interior angles540°
measure of each angle
120°
4-sidesquadrilateral
measure of each angle
108°
sum of interior angles360°
measure of each angle
90°
measure of each angle
60°
sum of interior angles180°
3-sidestriangle
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 167161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 167 6/7/08 2:28:18 PM6/7/08 2:28:18 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 168 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Find the indicated measure for each figure.1. 2.
Provide details for Theorem 10.9 in the student book by defining each boldface word.
Inscribed Anglespp. 709–711
Angles of Inscribed Polygonspp. 711–712
124°
22°
Helping You Remember Describe how you could make a sketch that would help you remember the relationship between the measure of an inscribed angle and the measure of its intercepted arc.
Sample answer: Draw a diameter of a circle to divide it into two semicircles. —————————————————————————————————————————
Inscribe an angle in one of the semicircles; this angle will intercept the other—————————————————————————————————————————
semicircle. From your sketch, you can see that the inscribed angle is a right—————————————————————————————————————————
angle. The measure of the semicircle arc is 180°, so the measure of the—————————————————————————————————————————
inscribed angle is half the measure of its intercepted arc.—————————————————————————————————————————
m � RS = 44m∠BAC = 62
a polygon with 4 sides
a polygon which is drawn inside a circle such that all of its vertices lie on the circle
two angles whose sum is 180°
any two angles in a quadrilateral that are not consecutive
If a quadrilateral is inscribed in a circle, then its opposite angles
are supplementary.
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 168161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 168 6/7/08 2:28:27 PM6/7/08 2:28:27 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
10-
5
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tangents10-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 169 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 10-5. Predict two things you think you will learn about tangents.
Sample answer: how to identify common tangents1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use tangents to find2. ____________________________________________________
measures ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Use the Pythagorean Theorem to determine if the triangles with the specified sides are right triangles. (Lesson 8-2)
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
a in the same plane as a
that the circle in
exactly point
the point where a line intersects a
Vocabulary Link Use a dictionary to look up the origin of the word tangent. How can the origin of this word help you remember the definition of a tangent line?
Sample answer: The word tangent comes from the————————————————————————————
Latin word tangere, which means “to touch.” A line————————————————————————————
that is tangent to a circle just “touches” the circle in————————————————————————————
one point.————————————————————————————
tangent
point of tangency
a = 9, b = 40, c = 41
yes
a = 4, b = 5, c = 41
no
a = 6, b = 8, c = 10
yes
Active Vocabulary
line
circle intersects
one
tangent
circle
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 169161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 169 6/7/08 2:28:31 PM6/7/08 2:28:31 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 170 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Find the value of x. Assume that segments that appear to be tangent are tangent. Show your work in each box as indicated.
Fill in the missing measurements in the diagram below in the order specified. Justify each measurement.
Identify the length of each side of the right triangle.
Leg 1 = Leg 2 =
Hyp =
Use the Pythagorean Theorem to write an equation, then solve for x.
x2 + 122 = (x + 8)2
x2 + 144 = x2 + 16x + 64
80 = 16x
x = 5
x
x + 8
12
Tangentspp. 718–720
Circumscribed Polygonsp. 721
128
xx
1. The measure of this segment is 12 because of Theorem 10.11.
2. The measure of this segment is 4 because of Theorem 10.11.
4. The measure of this segment is 7 because of Theorem 10.11.
3. The measure of this segment is 7 because of segment addition.
11
12
4
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 170161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 170 6/7/08 2:28:34 PM6/7/08 2:28:34 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Secants, Tangents, and Angle Measures10-6
Less
on
10-
6
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 171 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about secants, tangents, and angle measures.
Sample answer: The measure of an inscribed1. ____________________________________________________
angle is half the measure of its intercepted arc. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: A tangent line intersects a circle2. ____________________________________________________
at one point. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Determine the measure of each angle in the diagram. Justify your answers. (Lesson 1-5)
New Vocabulary Write the definition next to the term.
a line which intersects a circle in exactly two points————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Details
Find the value of x. Show your work in each box as indicated.
secant
Intersections On or Inside a Circlepp. 727–729
Angle 1 is 55° because it is supplementary to the 125° angle.
Angle 2 is 125° because it is a vertical angle with the given angle.
Angle 3 is 55° because it is a vertical angle with angle 1.
Active Vocabulary
12
3125°
Main Idea
Determine the measure of ∠CAF.136° 62°
x°
Determine the measure of ∠EAF.
m∠EAF = 1 − 2 ( 62 + 136 ) = 99
81
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 171161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 171 6/7/08 2:28:38 PM6/7/08 2:28:38 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-6 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 172 Glencoe Geometry
Label each diagram and explain how you would determine the measure of ∠1 in each diagram.
Intersections Outside a Circlepp. 729–731
intercepted arc tangent
secant1
The measure of ∠1 is one half the measure of the intercepted arc.
intercepted arc secant
intercepted arc secant
The measure of ∠1 is one half the measure of the difference of the intercepted arc.
1
Main Idea
Helping You Remember Some students have trouble remembering the difference between a secant and a tangent. What is an easy way to remember which is which?
Sample answer: A secant cuts a circle, while a tangent just touches it at one—————————————————————————————————————————
point. You can associate tangent with touches because they both start with t. —————————————————————————————————————————
Then associate secant with cuts.—————————————————————————————————————————
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 172161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 172 6/7/08 6:43:37 AM6/7/08 6:43:37 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Special Segments in a Circle10-7
Less
on
10-
7
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 173 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in the lesson.
Sample answer: how to fi nd the measure of1. ____________________________________________________
segments that intersect inside a circle ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to fi nd the measure of2. ____________________________________________________
segments that intersect outside a circle ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the definition next to each term. (Lessons 10-1, 10-5, and 10-6)
a segment with endpoints on the circle————————————————————————————
a line which intersects a circle in exactly two points————————————————————————————
the point where a line intersects a circle————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Match each term with its definition by drawing a line to connect the two.
a segment formed when two chords intersect inside a circle
a segment of a secant line that has exactly one endpoint on the circle
a segment of a tangent line that has exactly one endpoint on the circle
a segment of a secant line that has an endpoint which lies in the exterior of the circle
chord
secant
tangent
tangent segment
secant segment
external secant segment
chord segment
Active Vocabulary
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 173161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 173 6/7/08 8:36:59 PM6/7/08 8:36:59 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-7 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 174 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use Theorem 10.15 from the student book to find x.
Compare and contrast Theorem 10.16 with Theorem 10.15 from the student book.
How are they the same?Both define a relationship between the segments created when secants/chords intersect. Both relationships equate the products of segments.
How are they different?10.16 equates the products of the two pieces of the divided chords. 10.16 equates the products of the whole segment with the part of the segment outside the circle.
Segments Intersecting Inside a Circlepp. 736–737
Segments Intersecting Outside a Circlepp. 738–739
RP = 12, PS = 3x + 5, QP = 15, PT = 24
RP � PS = QP � PT
� �=
=
=
12 3x + 5 15 24
36036x + 60
x8 1 −
3
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 174161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 174 6/7/08 2:28:47 PM6/7/08 2:28:47 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Equations of Circles10-8
Less
on
10-
8
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 175 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about equations of circles.
Sample answer: The Pythagorean Theorem is 1. ____________________________________________________
a2 + b2 = c2. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: The Distance Formula is2. ____________________________________________________
√ ��������� (x1 - x
2)2 + (y
1 - y
2)2 . ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Use the Distance Formula to find the distance between the given pairs of points on the coordinate plane. (Lesson 1-5)
New Vocabulary Fill in the blank with the correct term or phrase.
a locus that satisfies more than one set of conditions————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Vocabulary Link Previously, you wrote the equation of a line when given the graph of the line. Compare and contrast this process with writing the equation of a circle given the graph of the circle.
Sample answer: Both a line and a circle have a————————————————————————————
general form. When writing equations of each, you————————————————————————————
must identify two important characteristics of the————————————————————————————
graph. In a line, you need the y-intercept and the ————————————————————————————
slope. In a circle, you need the center and the radius.————————————————————————————
compound locus
(1, 2) and (9, 11)
√ �� 145
(9, 11) and (-7, -7)
2 √ �� 145
(1, 2) and (-7, -7)
√ �� 145
Active Vocabulary
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 175161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 175 6/7/08 2:28:51 PM6/7/08 2:28:51 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 10-8 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 176 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Write the equation of a circle that has a center at (1, 3) and passes though (6, -3).
Graph the circle given by the equation (x + 4)2 + (y - 2)2 = 16.
Equation of a Circlepp. 744–745
Graph Circlespp. 745–746
y
x
Rewrite the equation in standard form.
(x - (-4))2 + (y - 2)2 = 16
Find the length of the radius using the center and the point of the circle.
√ �������� (6 - 1) 2 + (-3 - 3) 2 = √ ����� 5 2 + (-6) 2 = √ �� 61
Determine h, k, and r2.
h = 1 k = 3 r2 = 61
Write the equation of the circle.
(x - 1 )2 + (y - 3 )2 = 61
Use the center and radius to identify four points on the circle.
(-8, 2), (0, 2),
(-4, 6), (-4, -2)
Identify the center. (-4, 2)
Identify the radius. 4
161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 176161-176_GEOSNC10_890858.indd 176 6/7/08 6:45:50 AM6/7/08 6:45:50 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF 2nd
Chapter 10 177 Glencoe Geometry
Name each part of the circle shown below.
Circles
�
�
�
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec9:177001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec9:177 6/17/08 8:53:49 PM6/17/08 8:53:49 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 10 178 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 10.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 10 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 10 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • To prepare to take lecture notes, make a column to the left about 2 inches wide. Use
this column to write additional information from your text, place question marks, and to summarize information.
Circles
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec9:178001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec9:178 6/14/08 12:44:58 AM6/14/08 12:44:58 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 11 179 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about areas of parallelograms and triangles. List three things you already know about them in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about them in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • Write down questions that you have about what you are reading in the lesson. Then record the answer to each question as you study the lesson.
• A visual (graph, diagram, picture, chart) can present information in a concise, easy-to-study format.
Clearly label your visuals and write captions when needed.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
Areas of Parallelograms and Triangles
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec10:179001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec10:179 6/14/08 12:47:56 AM6/14/08 12:47:56 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 11 180 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on areas of circles and sectors, one fact might be a sector of a circle is a region of a circle bounded by a central angle and its intercepted arc. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Areas of Parallelograms and Triangles
Lesson Fact
11-1 Areas of Parallelograms and Triangles
See students’ work.
11-2 Areas of Trapezoids, Rhombi, and Kites
11-3 Areas of Circles and Sectors
11-4 Areas of Regular Polygons and Composite Figures
11-5 Areas of Similar Figures
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec10:180001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec10:180 6/14/08 12:48:00 AM6/14/08 12:48:00 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Less
on
11-
1
Areas of Parallelograms and Triangles11-1
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 181 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 11-1. Predict two things you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to use the formula for finding 1. ____________________________________________________
the area of a parallelogram ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the formula for finding 2. ____________________________________________________
the area of a triangle ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Define parallelogram in your own words. (Lesson 6-2)
Sample answer: a quadrilateral with both pairs of ————————————————————————————
opposite sides parallel————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Match each term with its definition.
the perpendicular distance between any two parallel bases
any side of a triangle
any side of a parallelogram
the length of an altitude drawn to a given base
Vocabulary Link Formula is a word that is used in everyday English. This lesson introduces two new formulas. Find the definition of formula using a dictionary. Explain how its English definition can help you understand the meaning of formula in mathematics.
Sample answer: A formula is a fixed procedure for————————————————————————————
doing something. In mathematics, it is a rule for ————————————————————————————
finding a value (usually expressed with algebraic ————————————————————————————
symbols).————————————————————————————
base of a parallelogram
height of a parallelogram
base of a triangle
height of a triangle
Active Vocabulary
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 181181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 181 6/10/08 11:52:29 PM6/10/08 11:52:29 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 11-1 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 182 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Find the perimeter and area of the parallelogram below. Round to the nearest tenth if necessary.
The perimeter measures cm.
The height of the parallelogram measures cm.
The area of the parallelogram measures cm2.
Use the organizer below to determine how the area of a triangle is related to the area of a rectangle.
Areas of Parallelogramspp. 763–764
Areas of Trianglespp. 765–766
64
8
176
Now you have two ‘s.
How do these triangles relate to the rectangle?
Area of a rectangle?
Draw a diagonal.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new formula in geometry is to relate it to a formula you already know. How can you use the formula for the area of a rectangle to help you remember the formula for the area of a parallelogram?
Sample answer: Due to the Area Addition Postulate, a parallelogram can be —————————————————————————————————————————
made into a rectangle, making their area formulas exactly the same.—————————————————————————————————————————
22 cm
10 cm
6 cm
A = bh
Conclusion: The rectangle cut in half gives two triangles. Therefore, the area of a triangle is equal to one half the area of a rectangle.Area of Triangle = 1 −
2 bh
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 182181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 182 6/10/08 11:52:32 PM6/10/08 11:52:32 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Areas of Trapezoids, Rhombi, and Kites 11-2
Less
on
11-
2
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 183 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 11-2. Write two facts you learned about trapezoids, rhombi, and kites as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: the definition of a trapezoid 1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the formula for finding 2. ____________________________________________________
the area of a trapezoid ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 6-2, 6-6, and 11-1)
The is any side of a triangle.
A quadrilateral with both pairs of opposites sides is known as a(n) .
A(n) is a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides.
New Vocabulary Define height of a trapezoid in your own words.
Sample answer: The height of a trapezoid is the ————————————————————————————
perpendicular distance between its two bases.————————————————————————————
Vocabulary Link Area is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of area using a dictionary. Explain how its English definition can help you understand its meaning in mathematics.
Sample answer: Area is any particular extent of space ————————————————————————————
or surface. In mathematics, it is a quantitative ————————————————————————————
measure of a plane or curved surface.————————————————————————————
parallelogram
trapezoid
base of a triangle
Active Vocabulary
base of a triangle
parallelogram
trapezoid
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 183181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 183 6/10/08 11:52:38 PM6/10/08 11:52:38 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 11-2 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 184 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Derive the formula for the area of a trapezoid.
In the formula for finding the area of a rhombus or kite, A = 1 −
2 d1d2, what do d1 and d2 represent?
the lengths of the diagaonals————————————————————————————
Find the area of the kite.
The area of the kite is .
Areas of Trapezoidspp. 773–774
Areas of Rhombi and Kitespp. 775–776
90 in2
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new geometric formula is to state it in words. Write a short sentence that tells how to find the area of a trapezoid in a way that is easy to remember.
Sample answer: To find the area of a trapezoid, add the bases, multiply their —————————————————————————————————————————
sum by its height, then divide that product in half.—————————————————————————————————————————
18 in.
10 in.
These two congruent trapezoids together make one parallelogram.
Area of parallelogram = (b1 + b2)h
Take a basic trapezoid and make a glide reflection of it.
h h
b1 b2
b2 b1
Therefore, the formula for the area of a trapezoid = 1 −
2 (b
1 + b
2)h.
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 184181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 184 6/10/08 11:52:41 PM6/10/08 11:52:41 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Areas of Circles and Sectors11-3
Less
on
11-
3
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 185 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about areas of circles and sectors.
Sample answer: how to find the area of circles1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the area of sectors of 2. ____________________________________________________
circles ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition. (Lessons 10-2, 11-1, and 11-2)
any side of a triangle
an angle with a vertex in the center of a circle and with sides that contain two radii of the circle
the length of an altitude drawn to a given base of a triangle
the distance between the two bases of a trapezoid
a portion of a circle defined by two endpoints
any side of a parallelogram
New Vocabulary Define the sector of a circle in your own words.
Sample answer: A sector of a circle is a region of ————————————————————————————
a circle bounded by a central angle and its ————————————————————————————
intercepted arc.————————————————————————————
base of a triangle
central angle
height of a triangle
height of a trapezoid
arc
base of a parallelogram
Active Vocabulary
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 185181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 185 6/10/08 11:52:45 PM6/10/08 11:52:45 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 11-3 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 186 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea
Areas of Circles pp. 782–783
Areas of Sectorspp. 783–784
Details
Find the area of each circle. Round to the nearest tenth.
1. 2.
Use the organizer below and fill in the parts of the proportion that can be used to find the area of a sector.
=
Use the completed proportion to find the area of the shaded sector. Round to the nearest tenth.
A ≈
254.3 cm2 153.9 in2
A
The ratio of the area A of a sector to the area of the whole circle, πr2, is equal to the ratio of the degree measure of the intercepted arc x to 360.
πr2 360
x
Helping You Remember A good way to remember something is to explain it to someone else. Suppose your classmate Joelle is having trouble remembering which formula is for circumference and which is for area. How can you help her?
Sample answer: Circumference is measured in linear units, while area is —————————————————————————————————————————
measured in square units, so the formula containing r2 must be one for area. —————————————————————————————————————————
7.7 square units
18 cm 7 in.
4 units
55°
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 186181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 186 6/10/08 11:52:49 PM6/10/08 11:52:49 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Areas of Regular Polygons and Composite Figures
11-4
Less
on
11-
4
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 187 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 11-4. Predict two things you think you will learn about areas of regular polygons and composite figures.
Sample answer: how to identify segments and 1. ____________________________________________________
angles in regular polygons ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the formula for the 2. ____________________________________________________
area of a regular polygon ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Answer the questions about the elements of the diagram below. (Lesson 10-2)
1. Angle A is what type of angle?
2. The portion of the circle that is defined by endpoints B and C is known as a(n) .
New Vocabulary Match each term with its definition.
the radius of the circle that is circumscribed about the regular polygon
the center of the circle in which the regular polygon is inscribed
has its vertex at the center of the polygon and its sides pass through consecutive vertices of the polygon
a segment drawn perpendicular to a side of a regular polygon
apothem
radius of a regular polygon
center of a regular polygon
central angle of a polygon
Active Vocabulary
central angle
arc
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 187181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 187 6/10/08 11:52:53 PM6/10/08 11:52:53 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 11-4 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 188 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Identify the parts of the regular polygon.
Using the formula A = 1 − 2 aP, where A is the area of a
regular polygon, a is the apothem, and P is the perimeter, find the area of the regular octagon below.
The area of the regular octagon is .
Areas of Regular Polygonspp. 791–793
Areas of Composite Figurespp. 793–794
Helping You Remember Rolando is having trouble remembering when to subtract an area when finding the area of a composite figure. How can you help him remember?
Sample answer: Subtraction is usually needed when part of the figure is —————————————————————————————————————————
shaded and part is not shaded.—————————————————————————————————————————
396 in2
11 in.9 in.
What is the center?V
Name a central angle. Sample answer: ∠QVR
Name a radius.Sample answer: −−
VR
Name an apothem.Sample answer:−−
VW
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 188181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 188 6/10/08 11:52:57 PM6/10/08 11:52:57 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Areas of Similar Figures11-5
Less
on
11-
5
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 189 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 11-5. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Areas of Similar Figures1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Scale Factors in Similar Figures2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Define similar polygons in your own words. (Lesson 7-2)
Sample answer: Two polygons are similar if all their ————————————————————————————
corresponding angles are congruent, and all of their ————————————————————————————
corresponding sides are proportional.————————————————————————————Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 10-1 and 11-3)
A slice of pie would be an example of a(n) .
A figure or shape enclosed by another geometric shape or figure is .
A(n) is the part of the interior of a circle bound by a chord and an arc.
Vocabulary Link Similar is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of similar using a dictionary. Explain how its English definition can help you understand its meaning in mathematics.
Sample answer: Similar means to have a likeness or ————————————————————————————
a resemblance. In mathematics, it has to do with the ————————————————————————————
specifi c likeness of fi gures or polygons.————————————————————————————
segment of a circle
sector of a circle
inscribed
sector of a circle
inscribed
segment of a circle
Active Vocabulary
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 189181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 189 7/2/08 8:09:47 PM7/2/08 8:09:47 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 11-5 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 11 190 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
For the pair of similar triangles below, find the area of �DEF.
Complete the missing parts of the proportion below.
Areas of Similar Figures pp. 802–803
Scale Factors and Missing Measures in Similar Figurespp. 803–804
If you know the areas of two similar geometric shapes, you can use them to find the scale factor between them.
Area of WXYZ = 45 cm2
Area of ABCD = 20 cm2
Use k as the scale factor.
area of ABCD −− area of WXYZ
= k2
= k2 4 − 9 = k
2
Helping You Remember Anthony thinks that similar figures are equal figures. How can you explain to him that similar and equal are not the same?
Sample answer: Tell him that similar figures will have the same shape, but they —————————————————————————————————————————
will not be the same size. Equal figures, otherwise known as congruent figures, —————————————————————————————————————————
have both the same shape and the same size.—————————————————————————————————————————
9 yd
6 yd
A = 3 yd2
A = 6.75 yd2
D
FA
C B
E
The scale factor,
k = . 2 − 3 20
− 45
181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 190181-190-GEOSNC11_890858.indd 190 6/11/08 12:47:57 AM6/11/08 12:47:57 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 11 191 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a formula from the chapter and identify the variables in the diagram.
Areas of Polygons and Circles
Figure Formula Diagram
Parallelogram A = bh
Triangle A = 1 − 2 bh
Trapezoid A = 1 − 2 h(b
1 + b
2)
RhombusKite
A = 1 − 2 d
1d
2
Circle A = πr2
Sector A = x −
360 πr2
Regular Polygon A = 1 − 2 aP
b
h
b
h
b2
b1
h
d2d1
r
x°
r
a
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec10:191001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec10:191 6/14/08 12:45:03 AM6/14/08 12:45:03 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 11 192 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 11.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 11 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 11 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • If possible, rewrite your notes. Not only can you make them clearer and neater,
rewriting them will help you remember the information.
Areas of Polygons and Circles
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec10:192001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec10:192 6/14/08 12:45:11 AM6/14/08 12:45:11 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 12 193 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, think about what you know about surface area and volume. List three things you already know about extending surface area and volume in the first column. Then list three things you would like to learn about in the second column.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When you take notes, listen or read for main ideas. Then record those ideas for future reference.
• To help you organize data, create study cards when taking notes, recording and defining vocabulary words, and explaining concepts.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
See students’ work.
Extending Surface Area and Volume
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec11:193001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec11:193 6/14/08 12:48:04 AM6/14/08 12:48:04 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 12 194 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on volumes of pyramids and cones, one fact might be pyramids use 1 −
3 of the area of base in the formula for volume. After completing the chapter, you can
use this table to review for your chapter test.
Extending Surface Area and Volume
Lesson Fact
12-1 Representations of Three-Dimensional Figures
See students’ work.
12-2 Surface Areas of Prisms and Cylinders
12-3 Surface Areas of Pyramids and Cones
12-4 Volumes of Prisms and Cylinders
12-5 Volumes of Pyramids and Cones
12-6 Surface Areas and Volumes of Spheres
12-7 Spherical Geometry
12-8 Congruent and Similar Solids
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec11:194001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec11:194 6/14/08 1:40:06 AM6/14/08 1:40:06 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Representations of Three-Dimensional Figures12-1
Less
on
12-
1
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 195 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples for Lesson 12-1. Predict two things you think you will learn about representations of three-dimensional figures.
Sample answer: how to sketch a solid when given 1. ____________________________________________________
its dimensions ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to identify cross sections of 2. ____________________________________________________
various solids ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Define arc of a circle in your own words. (Lesson 11-3)
Sample answer: a portion of a circle defi ned by two ————————————————————————————
endpoints————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.the intersection of a solid and a plane
a corner view of a three-dimensional geometric solid on two-dimensional paper
Vocabulary Link Cross section is an expression that is used in everyday English. Either find the definition of cross section using a dictionary or think of how you have heard it used outside of geometry. Explain any similarities between its everyday use and its use in mathematics.
Sample answer: Cross section is often used to refer ————————————————————————————
to a sample section or selection of a certain ————————————————————————————
population during a study of characteristics or ————————————————————————————
opinions of people. In mathematics, it refers to a ————————————————————————————
specifi c view or section when studying the ————————————————————————————
characteristics of solid fi gures.————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
cross section
isometric view
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 195195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 195 6/11/08 1:34:29 AM6/11/08 1:34:29 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-1 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 196 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the graphic organizer below.
Name the different cross sections of a cylinder. State how the plane would have to intersect the cylinder to get that particular cross section.
circle; the plane intersects the cylinder1. ____________________________________________
parallel to the circular base ____________________________________________
ellipse; the plane intersects the cylinder2. ____________________________________________
at an angle ____________________________________________
rectangle; the plane intersects the cylinder3. ____________________________________________
perpendicular to the circular base ____________________________________________
Draw Isometric Viewspp. 823–824
Investigate Cross Sectionsp. 824
two different ways to draw an isometric sketch of a solid.
Draw an isometric view from the dimensions.
Draw an isometric view from an orthographic drawing.
Helping You Remember Look up the word isometry in the dictionary. Compare its definition with the definition of corner view and perspective view. Why are corner views considered isometric views, but three-dimensional views not considered isometric views?
Sample answer: An isometry is a distance preserving transformation. Corner —————————————————————————————————————————
views represent the actual distances of fi gures, while three-point perspective —————————————————————————————————————————
views represent the apparent distances of fi gures.—————————————————————————————————————————
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 196195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 196 6/11/08 1:34:38 AM6/11/08 1:34:38 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Surface Areas of Prisms and Cylinders12-2
Less
on
12-
2
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 197 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 12-2. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Lateral Areas and Surface Areas 1. ____________________________________________________
of Prisms ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Lateral Areas and Surface Areas 2. ____________________________________________________
of Cylinders ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Label the elements of this oblique pentagonal prism with the correct terms.
1. Arrow “A” is pointing to a(n) .
2. Arrow “B” is pointing to .
3. Arrow “C” is pointing to a(n) .
4. Arrow “D” is pointing to a(n) .
5. Arrow “E” is pointing to a(n) .
Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase
A(n) of a cylinder is the segment with endpoints that are centers of the circular bases.
The of a prism is the sum of the areas of the lateral faces.
altitude
lateral edge
lateral face
base edge
bases
lateral area
axis
lateral edge
base edge
bases
altitude
lateral face
Active Vocabulary
axis
lateral area
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 197195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 197 6/11/08 1:34:42 AM6/11/08 1:34:42 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-2 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 198 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the diagram to show the parts of the area formulas for prisms.
Given the base edges of the prism above are: 8, 6, 5, and 5 inches, and that the height of the prism is 10 inches, find its lateral area. 240 in2
The cylindrical canister below has a surface area of 33 in2. Use the formula S = 2πrh + 2πr2.
What is the approximate height of the canister? 2 in.
Lateral Areas and Surface Areas of Prismspp. 830–831
Lateral Areas and Surface Areas of Cylinderspp. 832–833
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical term is to relate it to an everyday use of the same word. How can the way the word lateral is used in sports help you remember the meaning of the lateral area of a solid?
Sample answer: In football, a pass thrown to the side is called a lateral pass. In —————————————————————————————————————————
geometry, the lateral area is the “side area,” or the sum of the areas of all the —————————————————————————————————————————
side surfaces of the solid (the surfaces other than the bases).—————————————————————————————————————————
1.5 in.
h
The lateral areaL is L = Ph.
The surface areaS is S = L + 2B.
P = perimeter of the base
B = area of the base
h = height of the prism
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 198195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 198 6/11/08 1:34:46 AM6/11/08 1:34:46 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Surface Areas of Pyramids and Cones12-3
Less
on
12-
3
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 199 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about surface areas of pyramids and cones.
Sample answer: how to fi nd lateral areas and 1. ____________________________________________________
surface areas of pyramids ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to fi nd lateral areas and 2. ____________________________________________________
surface areas of cones ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Label the following solids as right or oblique. (Lesson 12-1)
1. 2. 3.
1.
2.
3.
New Vocabulary Match each term with its definition.
the height of each lateral face of a regular pyramid
a figure where the axis of a cone is also its altitude
a figure with a base that is a regular polygon and the altitude has an endpoint at the center of the base
a figure where the axis of a cone is not its altitude
regular pyramid
slant height
right cone
oblique cone
right
right
oblique
Active Vocabulary
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 199195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 199 6/11/08 1:34:51 AM6/11/08 1:34:51 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-3 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 200 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the formulas below to find the lateral and the surface area of the regular pyramid pictured.
Lateral area, L = 1 − 2 P�, where P is the
perimeter of the base and � is the slant height.
L =
Surface area, S = 1 − 2 P� + B, where
P is the perimeter of the base, � is the slant height, and B is the area of the base.
S =
Follow the steps to find the surface area of a cone.
1. Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the slant height of the cone. Round your answer to the nearest tenth. 21.2 cm
2. Use the formula above to find the cone’s surface area. Round to the nearest centimeter. 228 cm2
Lateral Area and Surface Area of Pyramidspp. 838–840
Lateral Area and Surface Area of Conespp. 840–842
99 cm2
121.4 cm2
cone heighth = 21 cm
radiusr = 3 cm
slant height� = ?
surface area
S = πr� + πr2
Helping You Remember One way to remember a new formula is to relate it to a formula you already know. Explain how the formulas for the lateral areas of a pyramid and cone are similar.
Sample answer: Both formulas say that the lateral area includes the distance —————————————————————————————————————————
around the base multiplied by the slant height.—————————————————————————————————————————
8 cm
3 cm
2.8 cm
� = 9 cm
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 200195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 200 6/11/08 1:34:55 AM6/11/08 1:34:55 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Volumes of Prisms and Cylinders12-4
Less
on
12-
4
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 201 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 12-4. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to use the formula for fi nding 1. ____________________________________________________
the volume of a prism ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to apply Cavalieri’s Principle 2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 12-1 through 12-3)
What shape describes the cross section of this sphere?
A(n) of a cylinder is the segment with endpoints that are centers of the circular bases.
When the axis of a cone is not its altitude this represents a(n) cone.
The of a prism is the sum of the areas of the lateral faces.
This type of paper is used to draw a(n) view of a solid.
isometric
circle
axis
lateral area
oblique
Active Vocabulary
circle
axis
oblique
lateral area
isometric
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 201195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 201 6/11/08 1:35:03 AM6/11/08 1:35:03 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-4 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 202 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Complete the steps to finding the volume of the prism below.
Use the formula V = πr2h to find the volume of the cylinder shown.
V = 502.4 cm3
Volume of Prismsp. 847
Volume of Cylinderspp. 848–849
Use the Theorem to find the area of the triangular base, B. Round to the nearest cubic inch. B = 50 in2
To find the volume, V of the prism, multiply the base, B by the of the prism.
Pythagorean
height, h
V =
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a mathematical concept is to explain it to someone else. Suppose that your younger sister, who is in eighth grade, is having trouble understanding why square units are used to measure area, but cubic units are needed to measure volume. How can you explain this to her in a way that will make it easy for her to understand and remember the correct units to use?
Sample answer: Area measures the amount of space inside a two-dimensional —————————————————————————————————————————
fi gure, while volume measures the amount of space inside a three-dimensional —————————————————————————————————————————
fi gure. A two-dimensional fi gure can be covered with small squares, which —————————————————————————————————————————
represent square units. A three-dimensional fi gure can be fi lled with small —————————————————————————————————————————
cubes, which represent cubic units.—————————————————————————————————————————
10 cm
4 cm
14.2 in.
10 in. 10 in.
16 in.
800 in3
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 202195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 202 6/11/08 1:35:07 AM6/11/08 1:35:07 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Volumes of Pyramids and Cones12-5
Less
on
12-
5
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 203 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about volumes of pyramids and cones.
Sample answer: There are different types of 1. ____________________________________________________
pyramids based upon the shape of the base. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Some cones are straight up and2. ____________________________________________________
down (right cones), and some are slanted in one ____________________________________________________
direction or another (oblique cones). ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lessons 11-1 through 11-5)
A. B.
C. D.
Polygon A represents a(n) .
Polygon B represents a(n) .
The arrow in C is pointing to the .
Figure D represents an example of a(n) .
πr2 is the formula for the .
1 − 2 (b1 + b2)h is the formula for the .
area of a trapezoid
height of a triangle
cubic unit
area of a circle
trapezoid
parallelogram
trapezoid
parallelogram
height of a triangle
cubic unit
area of a circle
area of a trapezoid
Active Vocabulary
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 203195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 203 6/11/08 1:35:12 AM6/11/08 1:35:12 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-5 (continued)
PDF-2nd
Chapter 12 204 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the pyramid shown to answer the following questions.
1. What is the height of the pyramid? 9 ft
2. In the formula for finding the volume
of a pyramid, V = 1 − 3 Bh, what does
the B represent? the pyramid’s base
3. Given that B = 17.5 ft2, find the volume of this pyramid to the nearest tenth of a cubic foot. 52.5 ft3
Use the diagram of a cone to fill in the missing measurements in the chart. Round your answer to the nearest tenth, as needed.
Volume of Pyramidsp. 857
Volume of Conesp. 858
Helping You Remember Many students find it easier to remember mathematical formulas if they can put them in words. Use words to describe in one sentence how to find the volume of any pyramid or cone.
Sample answer: Multiply the area of the base by the height and divide that —————————————————————————————————————————
product by 3.—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
—————————————————————————————————————————
Volume
V = 1 − 3 π r 2 h
h = 19 cm
r = 6.6 cm
V = 866.7 cm3
cone heighth = 19 cm
9 ft11 ft
radiusr = 6.6 cm
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 204195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 204 6/12/08 12:17:18 AM6/12/08 12:17:18 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Surface Areas and Volumes of Spheres12-6
Less
on
12-
6
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 205 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text in Lesson 12-6. Write two facts you learned about surface areas and volumes of spheres.
Sample answer: what it means to be a great circle1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: the formula for fi nding the 2. ____________________________________________________
volume of a sphere ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Label the parts of the sphere pictured below.
Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
One of the two congruent halves of a sphere separated by the great circle is known as a(n) ___________________.
When a plane intersects a sphere to form a circle which contains the center of the sphere, this forms a(n) ___________________.
A(n) ___________________ is one of the endpoints of a diameter of a great circle.
great circle
pole
hemisphere
great circle
pole
Active Vocabulary
hemisphere
radius
tangent
diameter
chord
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 205195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 205 6/11/08 1:35:21 AM6/11/08 1:35:21 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-6 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 206 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Follow the steps of the flowchart to find the surface area of the hemisphere.
Use the formula V = 4 − 3 πr3 (the formula for finding the
volume of a sphere) to answer each question. Round your answers to the nearest tenth.
1. Find the volume of a sphere with a diameter of 1.6 feet. 2.1 ft3
2. Find the volume of a sphere with a great circle circumference of 19 inches. 115.8 in3
3. Find the volume of a hemisphere with a radius of 7 centimeters. 718.4 cm3
Surface Area of Spherespp. 864–865
Volume of Spherespp. 866–867
The hemisphere’s surface area is comprised of half of the surface area of the sphere, plus the area of the great circle.
Numerically, that is
S = 1 − 2 (4π r2) + π r2.
Using r = 5 cm, find the value, S, of the surface area of this hemisphere.S = 235.5 cm2
r = 5 cm
Helping You Remember Many students have trouble remembering all of the formulas they have learned in this chapter. What is an easy way to remember the formula for the surface area of a sphere?
Sample answer: A sphere does not have any lateral faces or bases, so the —————————————————————————————————————————
expression in the formula for its surface area has just one term, 4π r2, rather —————————————————————————————————————————
than being the sum of the expressions for the lateral area and the area of the —————————————————————————————————————————
bases like the others.—————————————————————————————————————————
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 206195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 206 6/11/08 2:05:00 AM6/11/08 2:05:00 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Spherical Geometry12-7
Less
on
12-
7
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 207 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 12-7. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Geometry on a Sphere1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Comparing Euclidean and 2. ____________________________________________________
Spherical Geometries ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Match each term with its definition. (Lessons 12-1 and 12-3)
the intersection of a solid and a plane
a figure with a base that is a regular polygon and the altitude has an endpoint at the center of the base
The axis of a cone is also its altitude.
a corner view of a three-dimensional geometric solid on two-dimensional paper
the height of each lateral face of a regular pyramid
The axis of a cone is not its altitude.
New Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase.
is geometry where a plane is the surface of a sphere.
A geometry where a plane is a flat surface made up of points that extend infinitely in all directions is known as
.
A type of geometry in which at least one of the postulates is from Euclidean geometry is known as
.
oblique cone
right cone
cross section
isometric view
regular pyramid
slant height
Active Vocabulary
Spherical geometry
Euclidean geometry
non-Euclidean geometry
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 207195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 207 6/11/08 1:35:32 AM6/11/08 1:35:32 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-7 (continued)
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 208 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Use the diagram of the sphere below to answer each question.Sample answers:
1. Name two lines containing point P. � ⎯ � FC and � ⎯ � BE
2. Name a segment containing point Q.
−− BP
3. Name a triangle. �BAF
Complete the table below which compares different facts about Euclidean geometry and Spherical geometry.
Euclidean Spherical
A plane is a flat surface. A plane is a spherical surface.
The shortest distance between two points is a line segment.
The shortest distance between two points is a(n) arc of a great circle.
A line is infinite. A line is fi nite.
Through any two given points, there is exactly one line passing through them.
Through any two given points, there is one great circle passing through them.
A unit used to measure length is a(n) centimeter.
Degrees are the unit used to measure length.
Two points can be any distance apart. There is no greatest distance.
The greatest distance between two points is 180°.
Geometry on a Spherepp. 873–874
Compare Plane Euclidean and Spherical Geometriesp. 874
AB
C
DE
F
P
Q
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 208195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 208 6/11/08 1:35:35 AM6/11/08 1:35:35 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Congruent and Similar Solids12-8
Less
on
12-
8
PDF-Pass
Chapter 12 209 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in this lesson.
Sample answer: how to identify congruent or 1. ____________________________________________________
similar solids ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the properties of 2. ____________________________________________________
similar solids ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Define the following terms in your own words.
Sample answer: solids that have exactly the same ————————————————————————————
shape, but not necessarily the same size————————————————————————————
Sample answer: solids that have exactly the same ————————————————————————————
shape and the same size————————————————————————————
In your own words, what is meant by scale factor?
Sample answer: Scale factor is the common ratio ————————————————————————————
between the corresponding linear measures of ————————————————————————————
similar solids.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
similar solids
congruent solids
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 209195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 209 6/11/08 1:35:39 AM6/11/08 1:35:39 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 12-8 (continued)
PDF-2nd
Chapter 12 210 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Fill in the missing parts to the organizer below.
They have the same shape.
Ratios of corresponding linear measures are equal.
Apply what you learned with Theorem 12.1 in the Student Edition to answer the following:
Two similar pyramids have volumes of 125 cubic inches and 64 cubic inches. What is the ratio of the slant height of the large pyramid to the slant height of the small pyramid?
5:4
Identify Congruent or Similar Solidspp. 880–881
Properties of Congruent and Similar Solidspp. 881–882
How do you know if solids are similar?
How to Identify Congruent
Solids
Corresponding � are �.
Corresponding faces
are �.
Volumes are equal.Corresponding edges
are �.
Helping You Remember A good way to remember a new mathematical concept is to relate it to something you already know. How can what you know about the units used to measure lengths, areas, and volumes help you to remember the theorem about the ratios of surface areas and volumes of similar solids?
Sample answer: Lengths are measured in linear units, surface areas in square —————————————————————————————————————————
units, and volumes in cubic units. Take the scale factor, which is the ratio of—————————————————————————————————————————
linear measurements in the solids, and square it to get the ratio of their —————————————————————————————————————————
surface areas or cube it to get the ratio of their volumes.—————————————————————————————————————————
195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 210195-210_GEOSNC12_890858.indd 210 6/12/08 1:46:49 AM6/12/08 1:46:49 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF Pass
Chapter 12 211 Glencoe Geometry
Complete the graphic organizer with a formula from the chapter.
Extending Surface Area and Volume
Shape Lateral Area Surface Area Volume
Prism L = Ph S = L + 2B V = Bh
Cylinder L = 2πrh S = L + 2πr2 V = Bh
Pyramid L = 1 − 2 Pℓ S = L + B V = 1 −
3 Bh
Cone L = πrℓ S = L + πr2 V = 1 − 3 πr2h
Sphere S = 4πr2 V = 4 − 3 πr3
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec11:211001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec11:211 6/14/08 12:45:14 AM6/14/08 12:45:14 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 12 212 Glencoe Geometry
Review the ideas you listed in the table at the beginning of the chapter. Cross out any incorrect information in the first column. Then complete the table by filling in the third column.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 12.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 12 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 12 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • Use flash cards to study for tests by writing the concept on one side of the card and its
definition on the other.
K
What I know…
W
What I want to find out…
L
What I learned…
See students’ work.
Extending Surface Area and Volume
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec11:212001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec11:212 6/14/08 12:45:20 AM6/14/08 12:45:20 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before You Read
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 213 Glencoe Geometry
Before you read the chapter, respond to these statements.1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Study Organizer Construct the Foldable as directed at the beginning of this chapter.
Note Taking TipsNote Taking Tips • When taking notes, use a table to make comparisons about the new material.
Determine what will be compared, decide what standards will be used, and then use what is known to find similarities and differences.
• When taking notes on statistics, include your own statistical examples as you write down concepts and definitions.
This will help you to better understand statistics.
Probability and Measurement
Before You Read Probability and Measurement
See students’ work. • There are many different ways to
represent the sample space of an experiment.
• The Fundamental Counting Principle uses addition to count the total number of outcomes.
• In a permutation, the order is not important.
• Compound events can be independent or dependent.
• When one event affects another event, the events are mutually exclusive.
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec12:213001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec12:213 6/14/08 12:48:14 AM6/14/08 12:48:14 AM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Key Points
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 214 Glencoe Geometry
Scan the pages in the chapter and write at least one specific fact concerning each lesson. For example, in the lesson on geometric probability, one fact might be probability that involves a geometric measure such as length or area is called geometric probability. After completing the chapter, you can use this table to review for your chapter test.
Probability and Measurement
Lesson Fact
13-1 Representing Sample Spaces See students’ work.
13-2 Probabilities with Permutations and Combinations
13-3 Geometric Probability
13-4 Simulations
13-5 Probabilities of Independent and Dependent Events
13-6 Probabilities of Mutually Exclusive Events
001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec12:214001-026_GEOSNFM_890858.indd Sec12:214 6/14/08 12:48:19 AM6/14/08 12:48:19 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
13-
1
NAME DATE PERIOD
Representing Sample Spaces13-1
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 215 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan the text under the Now heading. List two things you will learn about in this lesson.
Sample answer: how to use lists, tables, and tree1. ____________________________________________________
diagrams to represent sample spaces ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use the Fundamental2. ____________________________________________________
Counting Principle to count outcomes ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Match each term with its definition.
one way of representing a sample space, using line segments known as branches, to display possible outcomes
experiments with more than two stages
the set of all possible outcomes of an experiment
a means used to find the entire sample space from an experiment that does not require listing all the possible outcomes
an experiment with two stages or events
Vocabulary Link Experiment is a word that is used in everyday English. Find the definition of experiment using a dictionary. Explain how its English definition can help you understand the meaning of experiment in mathematics.
Sample answer: In everyday English, the most————————————————————————————
common definition of experiment is a test or trial. In————————————————————————————
mathematics, an experiment involves testing a————————————————————————————
specific situation when chance, likelihood, or odds————————————————————————————
are involved.————————————————————————————
sample space
tree diagram
two-stage experiment
multi-stage experiment
Fundamental Counting Principle
Active Vocabulary
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 215215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 215 6/10/08 11:34:38 PM6/10/08 11:34:38 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 13-1 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 216 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
A number cube is rolled twice. Complete the sample space for this experiment.
How many possible outcomes are there? ____________
Sara takes orders at a restaurant where each sandwich is customized. Sara’s manager requires her to ask the following series of questions when placing the orders.
Use the Fundamental Counting Principle to find the number of different types of sandwiches that represent the sample space for chicken sandwich orders?
16 different types of sandwiches
Represent a Sample Spacepp. 899–900
Fundamental Counting Principlep. 901
36
Sandwich Shop1. Would you like your chicken fried
or grilled?2. Would you like bbq, honey mustard,
mayo, or no sauce?3. Would you like your sandwich
deluxe or regular?
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 216215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 216 6/10/08 11:34:41 PM6/10/08 11:34:41 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
13-
2
NAME DATE PERIOD
Probability with Permutations and Combinations
13-2
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 217 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Scan Lesson 13-2. List two headings you would use to make an outline of this lesson.
Sample answer: Probability Using Permutations1. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Probability Using Combinations2. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Define each term in your own words. (Lesson 12-7)
a type of geometry in which at least one————————————————————————————
of the postulates from Euclidean geometry fails————————————————————————————
a geometry where a plane is a flat surface made up————————————————————————————
of points that extend infinitely in all directions————————————————————————————
a geometry where a plane is the surface of a sphere————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
given a positive integer n, it is the product of the integers less than or equal to n
an arrangement of objects in which order is important
an arrangement of objects in which order is not important
an arrangement of objects in the form of a circle or loop
Non-Euclidean geometry
Euclidean geometry
Spherical geometry
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
Active Vocabulary
factorial
permutation
combination
circular permutation
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 217215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 217 6/10/08 11:34:45 PM6/10/08 11:34:45 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 13-2 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 218 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Follow and complete the steps in the flowchart below.A marching band is divided into squads of 8 musicians. Each squad is required to select leaders: a head squad leader and an assistant squad leader. Anders and Matthew are in one of the squads. If the positions are decided at random, what is the probability that Anders and Matthew are selected as leaders?
Leah is packing for a trip to Florida. She decides to pack 3 of her 8 travel games to take on the trip. If she chooses to select games at random, what is the probability that the games chosen are Leah’s 3 favorites?Use the formula for combinations, nCr = n! −
(n - r)!r! , when you
have n objects taken r at a time.
8C
3 = 8!
− (8 - 3)!3!
= 8 · 7 · 6 · 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 −−
(5!)3! =
8 · 7 · 6 · 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 −−
(5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1)(3 · 2 · 1) = 8 · 7 · 6 · 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1
−− (5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1)(3 · 2 · 1)
= 56
There is only one favorable outcome that the games————————————————————————————
chosen are Leah’s favorites. So, the probability of————————————————————————————
these 3 games being chosen is 1 − 56
.————————————————————————————
Probability Using Permutationspp. 906–909
Probability Using Combinationspp. 909–910
Step 1 The number of possible outcomes in the number of permutations of 8 people taken 2 at a time, 8P2.
8P2 = 8! − (8 - 2)!
= 8 · 7 · 6! − 6!
= 56
Step 2 The number of favorable outcomes in the number of permutations of these 2 students in each of the 2-leader positions is 2!, which is 2 · 1 or 2.
Step 3 So, the probability of Anders and Matthew being
selected as the 2 squad leaders is 2 − 56
or 1 − 28
.
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 218215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 218 6/10/08 11:34:48 PM6/10/08 11:34:48 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
13-
3
NAME DATE PERIOD
Geometric Probability13-3
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 219 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn
base of a parallelogram
base of a triangle
height of a parallelogram
height of a triangle
Scan the text in Lesson 13-3. Write two facts you learned about geometric probability as you scanned the text.
Sample answer: There are many real-world1. ____________________________________________________
applications of probability. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Sample answer: Probabilities can be found with2. ____________________________________________________
length and with area. ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Fill in each blank with the correct term or phrase. (Lesson 11-1)
The height of a triangle is the length of an altitude drawn to a given base.
Any side of a triangle is known as the base of a triangle .
Any side of a parallelogram is known as the base of a parallelogram .
The height of a parallelogram is the perpendicular distance between any two parallel bases.
New Vocabulary Define geometric probability in your own words.
Sample answer: Geometric probability is probability————————————————————————————
that involves a geometric measure such as length or————————————————————————————
area.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Active Vocabulary
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 219215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 219 6/10/08 11:34:52 PM6/10/08 11:34:52 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 13-3 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 220 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
The schedule for Meghan’s school is shown on the number line. The local fire department is going to randomly have a fire drill today. Find the probability the fire drill will be during Meghan’s lunch.
Darcy has a magnetic dartboard. What is the probability that Darcy’s magnetic darts will land in the central circle?
Sample answer: The probability is found by dividing————————————————————————————
the area of the center circle by the area of the entire————————————————————————————
dartboard: π · 52
− π · 92
= 25π
− 81π
≈ 31%.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Probability with Lengthpp. 915–916
Probability with Areapp. 916–917
Find the total time of the school day. (Include time between classes.) 390 minutes
Find the total time of the lunch period. 35 minutes
probability of fire drill during lunch
Find the probability the drill will be during lunch.
35 minutes
− 390 minutes
≈ 9%
1st bell7:20-8:10
2nd bell8:15-9:05
Homeroom7:00-7:15
3rd bell9:10-10:00
4th bell10:05-10:55
lunch10:55-11:30
dismissal1:30
5th bell11:35-1:30
9 in.5 in.
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 220215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 220 6/10/08 11:34:55 PM6/10/08 11:34:55 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
13-
4
NAME DATE PERIOD
Simulations13-4
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 221 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim Lesson 13-4. Predict two things that you expect to learn based on the headings and the Key Concept box.
Sample answer: how to design a simulation and1. ____________________________________________________
how to perform all the steps it involves ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to use different methods for2. ____________________________________________________
summarizing and displaying simulation data ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Match each term with its definition.
the average value of a random variable that one anticipates after repeating an experiment or simulation a theoretically infinite number of times
a variable that can assume a set of values, each with fixed probabilities
a mathematical model used to match a random phenomenon
as the number of trials of a random process increases, the average will approach the expected value
the use of a probability model to recreate a situation again and again so that the likelihood of various outcomes can be estimated
Vocabulary Link Simulation is a word that is used in everyday English. Explain how the English definition can help you remember how simulation is used in mathematics.
Sample answer: something anticipated or in testing; ————————————————————————————
This is primarily the same as its mathematical ————————————————————————————
definition as it is applied in the study of probability.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
probability model
simulation
random variable
expected value
Law of Large Numbers
Active Vocabulary
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 221215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 221 6/10/08 11:34:59 PM6/10/08 11:34:59 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 13-4 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 222 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Miranda bowled a strike in 75% of her frames over the last 9 months. Design a simulation that can be used to estimate the probability that she will bowl a strike in the next frame.Complete the missing pieces to the steps below. Step 1 Possible Outcomes
Step 2 Assume that Miranda will have the opportunity to bowl 50 more frames.
Step 3 Divide the spinner provided into two sectors to represent the two possible outcomes listed in Step 1.
bowl a strike not bowl a strike 75%(360°) 25%(360°)
Step 4 A trial, one spin of a spinner, will represent bowling 1 frame.
What will a successful trial represent? strike
What will a failed trial represent? not a strike
The simulation will consist of how many spins? 50
Conduct the simulation above and record your results in the table provided below. When your simulation is complete, find the experimental probability of Miranda bowling a strike on her next frame.
Outcome Tally Frequency
strike
11
not a strike
39
Total 50
number of strikes −− number of non-strikes
=
Design a Simulationpp. 923–924
Summarize Data from a Simulationpp. 924–926
She bowls a strike. She does not bowl a strike.
theoretical probability: 75% theoretical probability: 25%
11 −
39
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 222215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 222 6/10/08 11:35:02 PM6/10/08 11:35:02 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
13-
5
NAME DATE PERIOD
Probabilities of Independent and Dependent Events
13-5
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 223 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the Examples in Lesson 13-5. Predict two things you think you will learn about this lesson.
Sample answer: how to identify independent and1. ____________________________________________________
dependent events ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: how to find the probability of2. ____________________________________________________
independent events ____________________________________________________
New Vocabulary Write the correct term next to each definition.
a specific type of tree diagram that includes probabilities
events where the probability of one event occurring does not affect the probability of the other event occurring
consists of two or more simple events
a probability that uses the notation P(B�A)
events where the probability of one event occurring in some way changes the probability that the other event occurs
Vocabulary Link Independent and dependent are words used in everyday English. How do their English definitions apply to their definitions in probability?
Sample answer: Dependent means relying on————————————————————————————
something. In the case of probabilities, dependent————————————————————————————
means one event’s probability does rely on another————————————————————————————
event’s probability. Independent means not influenced————————————————————————————
by others. In the case of probabilities, independent————————————————————————————
events have no influence on each other’s probabilities.————————————————————————————
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
Active Vocabulary
probability tree
independent events
compound event
conditional probability
dependent events
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 223215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 223 6/10/08 11:35:06 PM6/10/08 11:35:06 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 13-5 (continued)
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 224 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
The probability that two independents occur follows the multiplication rule for probability: P(A and B) = P(A) · P(B). Extend the use of this multiplication rule for probability by creating a model of another set of independent events that can be used to demonstrate this rule. Sample answer:
Suppose a number cube is rolled and a coin is
tossed.
The sample space for this experiment is: {(1, H), (2, H),
(3, H), (4, H), (5, H), (6, H), (1, T), (2, T), (3, T), (4, T),
(5, T), (6, T)}.
Using the sample space, the probability of the
compound event of rolling a 6 and the coin landing on
heads is P(6 and H) = 1 −
12 .
The same probability can be found by multiplying the
probabilities of each simple event (hence, using the
multiplication rule for probability). P(6) = 1 − 6 ; P(H) = 1 −
2 ;
P(6 and H) = 1 − 6 · 1 −
2 or 1 −
12
Ms. Alexander’s class of 16 students sits at four different tables, with four students at each table. Ms. Alexander chose tables A and B to go to the lab, while those students at tables C and D remained seated. If Carly has to go to the lab, then what is the probability that she sits at Table A?
Sample answer: Because Carly is going to the lab, the————————————————————————————
sample space is reduced from the entire class, to just ————————————————————————————
the 8 students seated at tables A and B. So, the————————————————————————————
probability that Carly is at Table A is P(A| lab) = 4 −
8 or
1 −
2 .
———————————————————————————
Independent and Dependent Eventspp. 931–933
Conditional Probabilitiesp. 934
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 224215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 224 6/10/08 11:35:10 PM6/10/08 11:35:10 PM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
Less
on
13-
6
NAME DATE PERIOD
Probabilities of Mutually Exclusive Events13-6
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 225 Glencoe Geometry
What You’ll Learn Skim the lesson. Write two things you already know about mutually exclusive events.
Sample answer: Some events affect each other, 1. ____________________________________________________
while others do not affect each other. ____________________________________________________
Sample answer: The probability that an event will2. ____________________________________________________
not occur is called the complement. ____________________________________________________
Review Vocabulary Label the part of each diagram to which the arrow is pointing. (Lessons 11-1 and 11-2)
height of a triangle
trapezoid
3. base of a parallelogram
4. height of a parallelogram
New Vocabulary Define the following terms in your own words.
Sample answer: two events that cannot happen at the————————————————————————————
same time and have no common outcomes————————————————————————————
Sample answer: the probability that an event will not————————————————————————————
occur; This is found by subtracting the probability————————————————————————————
that the event will occur from 1.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
trapezoid
base of a parallelogram
height of a triangle
height of a parallelogram
mutually exclusive events
complement
Active Vocabulary
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 225215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 225 6/10/08 11:35:13 PM6/10/08 11:35:13 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Lesson 13-6 (continued)
PDF 2nd
Chapter 13 226 Glencoe Geometry
Main Idea Details
Model the following mutually exclusive events by representing their relationship in a Venn diagram below.When a die is rolled, find the probability of rolling a 1 or 6.
Is the following event mutually exclusive or not mutually exclusive?
when a die is rolled, the probability of rolling a number less than 5 or an odd number not mutually exclusive
At the local carnival, the probability of a dart to land on one of the playing cards on the board is 33%.
Name the complement of landing on one of the cards and the probability of the complement occurring.
Sample answer: The complement is the dart not ————————————————————————————
landing on a playing card. The probability of this ————————————————————————————
happening is 67%.————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————
Mutually Exclusive Eventspp. 938–940
Probabilities of Complementspp. 941–942
215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 226215_226_GEOSNC13_890858.indd 226 6/12/08 12:19:56 AM6/12/08 12:19:56 AM
Copyright
© G
lencoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill
, a d
ivis
ion o
f T
he M
cG
raw
-Hill
Com
panie
s,
Inc.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Tie It Together
PDF 2nd
Chapter 13 227 Glencoe Geometry
Complete each graphic organizer with a definition or formula from the chapter.
Sample Space
Experiment a situation involving chance that leads to results
Outcome the result of a single trial of an experiment
Event one or more outcomes of an experiment
Calculating Probability
Fundamental Counting Principle
The total possible outcomes in an experiment with k stages is n
1 • n
2 • n
3 • … • nk.
PermutationsnP
r = n!
− (n - r)!
CombinationsnC
r = n!
− (n - r)!r!
Circular Permutations n! −
n
Simulations the use of a probability model to recreate a situation and estimate the probability of various outcomes
Complement P(not A) = 1 - P(A)
Types of Probability
Geometric Probability probability that involves a geometric measure like length or area
Independent Events P(A and B) = P(A) • P(B)
Dependent Events P(A and B) = P(A) • P(B|A)
Conditional Probability P(B|A) = P(A and B)
− P(A)
Mutually Exclusive Events P(A and B) = P(A) + P(B)
Probability and Measurement
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec12:227001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec12:227 6/17/08 8:52:11 PM6/17/08 8:52:11 PM
Copyrig
ht ©
Gle
ncoe/M
cG
raw
-Hill, a
div
isio
n o
f Th
e M
cG
raw
-Hill C
om
panie
s, In
c.
NAME DATE PERIOD
Before the Test
PDF Pass
Chapter 13 228 Glencoe Geometry
Now that you have read and worked through the chapter, think about what you have learned and complete the table below. Compare your previous answers with these.
1. Write an A if you agree with the statement.2. Write a D if you disagree with the statement.
Math Online Visit glencoe.com to access your textbook, more examples, self-check quizzes, personal tutors, and practice tests to help you study for concepts in Chapter 13.
Are You Ready for the Chapter Test?Use this checklist to help you study.
□ I used my Foldable to complete the review of all or most lessons.
□ I completed the Chapter 13 Study Guide and Review in the textbook.
□ I took the Chapter 13 Practice Test in the textbook.
□ I used the online resources for additional review options.
□ I reviewed my homework assignments and made corrections to incorrect problems.
□ I reviewed all vocabulary from the chapter and their definitions.
Study TipsStudy Tips • You will do better on a test if you are relaxed. If you feel anxious, try some deep
breathing exercises. Don’t worry about how quickly others are finishing; do your best and use all the time that is available to you.
Probability and Measurement
Probability and Measurement After You Read
• There are many different ways to represent the sample space of an experiment.
A
• The Fundamental Counting Principle uses addition to count the total number of outcomes.
D
• In a permutation, the order is not important. D
• Compound events can be independent or dependent. A
• When one event affects another event the events are mutually exclusive.
D
001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec12:228001-026_GEOSNEM_890858.indd Sec12:228 6/14/08 12:45:28 AM6/14/08 12:45:28 AM